JP7176183B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine is known to provide a privilege such as a payout of a game ball based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry means or a ball entry section provided in a game area. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2005-074175 A

Here, in gaming machines, it is desired to devise ways to increase the degree of attention to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing attention to a game.

The present invention
a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
a passage forming body capable of forming a passage for game balls;
with
The passage forming body is displaceable between a first position and a second position different from the first position,
At the first position, a predetermined surface of the passage forming body can constitute the passage portion,
When the passage forming body is displaced from the first position to the second position, the game balls on a predetermined surface of the passage forming body can flow down to a predetermined area downstream from the predetermined surface. ,
A specific passing portion through which the game ball that has flowed down to the predetermined area can pass, and a predetermined privilege can be given based on the passage of the game ball through the specific passing portion,
a protruding portion provided on a predetermined surface of the passage forming body and protruding upward when the passage forming body is in the first position;
the passage forming body can be displaced between the first position and the second position by rotation;
The protruding portion is provided on a predetermined surface of the passage forming body at a predetermined portion close to the rotation base end portion of the passage forming member.

According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

It is a front view showing the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. 5 is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 4 showing an enlarged variable winning device and its peripheral configuration; FIG. (a) is a front view of a variable winning device and its peripheral configuration, and (b) and (c) are sectional views of the variable winning device. It is a perspective view of a variable winning device and its peripheral configuration. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main controller; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the normal game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the opening and closing execution mode. It is a front view showing a variable prize winning device and its peripheral configuration in Modification 1 of the first embodiment. It is a perspective view of the shutter in the variable winning device. (a) is a front view of a variable winning device and its peripheral configuration in a second embodiment, and (b) and (c) are sectional views of the variable winning device. (a) is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device and its peripheral configuration, and (b) is a plan view showing the rear surface portion of the opening/closing door. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the normal game state, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the opening/closing execution mode. (a) is a front view of a variable prize winning device and its peripheral configuration in a third embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view thereof. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device, and (b) is a plan view of the opening/closing member and its peripheral configuration. It is a perspective view of a variable winning device and its peripheral configuration. It is an explanatory view for explaining a modification of a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distribution table; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart which shows notice production control processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a notification effect; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the game flow in the opening/closing execution mode; FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in an open state in Modification 1 of the third embodiment; It is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the closed state in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a sectional view of the variable winning device in the open state A, and (b) is a plan view thereof. It is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the open state B. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distribution table, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of the variable winning device. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening and closing pattern of the variable prize winning device during one round game in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment, and (b) and (c) explain another example thereof. It is an explanatory diagram for. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between each round and the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device in Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a perspective view of an opening/closing member in Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation mode of the opening/closing member; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of each round in the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the jackpot type and the open state A in the opening and closing execution mode. is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of times of switching of . It is an explanatory view for explaining another example of modification 4 of a 4th embodiment. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of the 15th round in the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example thereof is. (a) is a front view of a variable winning unit and its peripheral configuration in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the variable winning unit. It is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning unit. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of an opening/closing member according to a sixth embodiment; It is a side view of an opening-and-closing member. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation mode of the opening/closing member in the opening/closing execution mode; (a) is a front view of a variable prize winning device and its peripheral configuration in Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of an opening/closing member. FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device corresponding to the AA line cross-section of FIG. 51(a). FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device corresponding to the AA line cross-section of FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of a winning unit and its peripheral configuration in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB of (a). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distribution table; FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of a game machine. It is a figure which shows another example of a flow-path formation part. It is a figure which shows another example of a flow-path formation part. It is a figure which shows another example of a game machine.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 is provided with a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire game area to be described later to be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61 . A display light-emitting portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as part of the various lamp portions. Speaker units 64 are provided on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63 to output sound effects according to the game situation.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65 , and a lower plate 72 that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66 . The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71 .

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 72 in the front door frame 14 . When the shooting handle 60 is operated, a game ball is shot toward the game area PE from a game ball shooting mechanism 53 provided below the game area PE in the inner frame 13 . In this case, by changing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 60, the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area PE, that is, the momentum of shooting is changed.

The game area PE is formed on a game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13 . The configuration of the game board 24 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

The game board 24 has a plate shape, and an inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to its surface (front surface). A game area PE is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 . In addition, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 form a guide rail 54 for guiding the game ball to the game area PE, and the game ball is fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 53 by rotating the shooting handle 60 by the player. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail 54 .

The guide rail 54 is formed on one side of the game area PE so that its exit portion faces the center of the upper part of the game area PE. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 60 by the player increases, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area PE shifts from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 54 is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the side of the side. The exit portion of the guide rail 54 is provided on the left side of the game area PE.

A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the area of the game board 24 that is defined as the game area PE by router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31 (see FIG. 5), an upper operating port (first starting ball entry portion) 33, a lower operating port (second starting ball entry portion) 34, a variable winning device 201, a through gate 35, A variable display unit 36, a main display section 43, a character object display section 44, and the like are provided.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the upper working opening 33, the lower working opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 201, the corresponding detection sensors (general winning opening winning sensor 31e, It is detected by the upper working opening winning sensor 33b, the lower working opening winning sensor 34c, the through winning winning sensor 35a, and the big winning opening winning sensor 202a). When the ball entering the general winning hole 31, the upper operating hole 33, the lower operating hole 34 and the variable winning device 201 is detected, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. In this case, when a ball entering the upper operating port 33 is detected, three prize balls are dispensed, and when a ball entering the lower operating port 34 is detected, two prize balls are dispensed. A payout is executed, and if a ball entering the general prize winning port 31 is detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and if a ball entering the variable prize winning device 201 is detected, 15 prizes are awarded. Ball payout is executed.

In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. The number may be the same. Also, the number of prize balls associated with the variable winning device 201 may be less than the number of prize balls associated with the operating ports 33 and 34, or may be the same as the number of prize balls associated with both the operating ports 33 and 34. However, in order to maintain the superiority of winning the variable prize winning device 201, it is preferable that the number of prize balls associated with the variable prize winning device 201 is larger than the number of prize balls associated with the operation ports 33,34. In addition, the number of prize balls related to the general winning hole 31 may be the same as or larger than the number of prize balls related to the variable winning device 201 . As will be described later, the general prize-winning port 31 is a ball-entering section that is unrelated to the game in which the jackpot lottery is performed, which is the core of the game, and the game during the jackpot. It can be said that the ball plays an auxiliary role in performing this core game. In that respect, the larger the number of prize balls related to the general prize winning port 31 (or the more likely the balls are to enter the general prize winning port 31), the less balls are held when performing a game or the like in which a jackpot lottery is performed. can be reduced or the number of prize balls obtained in total can be increased.

In addition, the game board 24 is provided with an out port, and game balls that do not enter various prize winning ports are ejected from the game area PE through the out port. The game board 24 is also provided with a large number of game nails 38 for properly distributing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. .

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the game ball in the game area PE after passing through the opening. Also included is a mode in which the game area PE continues to flow down without being discharged from the game area PE. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the game ball entering the out port, the game to the general winning port 31, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, the through gate 35 or the variable winning device 201 Entering a ball is also referred to as winning a prize. Of the general winning opening 31, the upper operating opening 33, the lower operating opening 34, the through gate 35 and the variable winning device 201, the through gate 35 is configured to return the winning game ball back to the game area PE. On the other hand, the other winning sections 31, 33, 34, 201 guide the winning game balls to the back side of the game board 24 so as not to return them to the game area PE (they do not enter the other winning sections or the out-port again). It is configured.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, a plurality of areas where game balls can flow down are divided.

Specifically, in the game area PE, an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area that is continuous with the upper area PE1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left area PE2 which is an area on the left, a right area PE3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PE1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a left area PE2 and a right area PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PE4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 continuously below it.

Which of these areas PE1 to PE4 the game area flows down (passes through) is determined by the amount of rotation operation of the shooting handle 60, that is, the force of shooting the game ball. Specifically, when the player rotates the shooting handle 60 as the first shooting operation with a rotation operation amount in a first range that is equal to or more than a predetermined rotation amount and less than a reference rotation amount, the shot is fired. A game ball that has been hit is more likely to be launched to the left than the center position in the horizontal direction in the upper region PE1. In this case, the game ball flows down the game area PE in the order of upper area PE1→left area PE2→lower area PE4.

On the other hand, when the player performs the rotation operation of the shooting handle 60 with a rotation operation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second shooting operation, the shot game ball moves laterally in the upper region PE1. It is easier to launch to the right than the center position of . In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper area PE1→right area PE3→lower area PE4. In other words, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 60, it is determined whether the game ball is to be played in the left route in which the game ball flows down the left region PE2 or in the right route in which the game ball flows down the right region PE3. , can be selected by the player.

The reference rotation amount is a rotation operation amount at which the ratio of the game ball flowing down the left region PE2 and the ratio of the game ball flowing down the right region PE3 are the same or substantially the same. is a rotation operation amount that allows the shot game ball to pass through the guide rail 54 and enter the game area PE. With the rotation operation amount in the first range, the percentage of game balls flowing down the left region PE2 increases, and with the rotation operation amount in the second range, the percentage of game balls flowing down the right region PE3 increases.

The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction, specifically the vertical direction, with the upper operating port 33 facing upward. A game ball can reach these upper working openings 33 and lower working openings 34 regardless of whether the player is performing the first shooting operation or the second shooting operation. The lower operation port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 34a has an open state (support state or guide state) that allows a ball to enter the lower working port 34, and a closed state that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the lower working port 34 than in the open state. (non-support state or non-guide state). Here, a supplementary description of the electric accessory 34a will be given.

An operating port case 33a that constitutes the upper operating port 33 protrudes forward and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the length of the upper side is smaller than the length of the lower side. At this time, the upper side length of the operating port case 33a (that is, the lateral width of the upper operating port 33) is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is the same when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. The length is greater than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 34a. Also, when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the installation interval between the two operation ports 33 and 34 is such that the distance between the operation port case 33a and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. is adjusted.

According to the above configuration, when the electric accessory 34a is closed, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation opening 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is opened, the winning to the lower operation opening 34 becomes possible. Especially at this time, during the movement of the electric accessory 34a from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the accessory 34a is fully opened, the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 34 is impossible, and the winning is possible only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully opened. In other words, the game ball falling from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is repelled to the outside, and does not enter the lower operating port 34 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in an extremely short time, it becomes extremely difficult to win the lower operation opening 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a continues. Easier to win prizes.

In addition to the configuration in which the working port case 33a of the upper working port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the working port case 33a of the upper working port 33 may have a two-stage structure with a narrow upper portion and a wide lower portion. Obstacle nails may be planted obliquely below the case 33a.

The variable winning device 201 is installed in the lower area PE4 on the game board 24, and more specifically, it is installed in the center in the horizontal direction at the bottom of the game area PE. The variable prize winning device 201 includes a large prize winning opening 202 (see FIG. 7B) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an opening/closing door 203 that opens and closes the special winning opening 202 . The opening/closing door 203 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot or hardly win prizes, and when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state), the game balls are likely to win. It can be switched to an open state.

Here, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot win or a special loss win is made. The opening/closing execution mode will be described later in detail. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 201, the variable winning device 201 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (eg 15 rounds) as the upper limit, with the elapse of a predetermined time (eg 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (eg 10) as one round. There is a mode to be done.

Flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are installed on both left and right sides of the lower region PE4 so as to sandwich the variable winning device 201 therebetween. The left flow path forming portion 131 forms a game ball flow path through which a game ball that has passed through the left region PE2 can flow down. It forms a game ball flow path that becomes possible. These flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are configured to guide the game balls that have flowed down the respective areas of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3 to the variable winning device 201, respectively, and are made of colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin. there is

Both of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 protrude from the front surface of the game board 24 toward the front of the game machine, and the front surfaces face the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 . The distance between the front surface of each flow path forming part 131, 161 and the window panel 62 is narrower than one game ball, and the game ball cannot pass in front of the flow path forming part 131, 161. It's becoming Therefore, the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 define a part of the outer edge of the game area PE (more specifically, the lower left and lower right outer edges of the game area PE). It should be noted that the front portions of the respective flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are shaped and colored in a predetermined manner and decorated.

The right channel forming portion 161 is provided with a main display portion 43 and a character item display portion 44 . The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the right flow path forming portion 161 . That is, the main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls can be seen in front of these display portions 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

The main display section 43 has a round display section RS for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is selected as a result of the internal lottery (or when the opening/closing execution mode is selected). A first result display part AS for indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the operation opening 33, and for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower operation opening 34. A second result display section BS is set.

In the round display section RS, display of the number of rounds starts when the opening/closing execution mode starts, and the display ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the first result display portion AS, the winning to the upper working port 33 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is performed. The results are clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the upper operation port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display part AS and the variable display is performed. is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the second result display section BS, the variable display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the lower working opening 34, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 34 is performed. The results are clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display part BS displays a predetermined stop result and fluctuating display. is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33, 34, the corresponding result display units AS, BS start the variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and stop the variable display. It corresponds to one game time. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display section, the variable display is started in the single result display section, and the game cycle is continued until the variable display is stopped while a predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

The character item display section 44 is a display section for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 . In this case, in the character object display unit 44, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger. The result of is specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the display part 44 for the accessory and the variable display is performed. is stopped, it shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric operation open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operation opening 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the main display unit 43 and character object display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, they are not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used. good too.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a pattern display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. A center frame 42 is arranged in the variable display unit 36 so as to surround the pattern display device 41 . The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the pattern display device 41, and the configuration is such that the visibility of the display screen is not lowered due to the game ball falling. .

The pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the pattern display device 41, for example, patterns are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by being scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34 . That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display section 43, the variable display is performed on the pattern display device 41 accordingly. For example, in the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the large winning opening 202 of the variable prize winning device 201 is opened 15 times is set in the symbol display device 41 in advance. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

A first holding light emitting section 45 corresponding to the first result display section AS and the pattern display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42 . The number of winning game balls in the upper operation port 33 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the first reservation light emitting part 45.例文帳に追加A second holding light emitting section 46 corresponding to the second result display section BS and the pattern display device 41 is provided on the upper right portion of the front side of the center frame 42 . The number of winning game balls in the lower operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second reservation light emitting part 46.例文帳に追加As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding light-emitting unit 45 and the second holding light-emitting unit 46 is not hindered by the falling game balls. ing.

A third holding light-emitting portion 47 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided at the lower portion of the center frame 42 . The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the third reservation light emitting part 47.例文帳に追加Note that each of the holding light emitting units 45 to 47 may be configured to be displayed on a part of the pattern display device 41, or the like.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the board box 83 . Since the box coupling portions 85 are inseparably connected, the circuit board box 83 needs to be destroyed or partly excised when the internal space of the circuit board box 83 is opened. A plurality of box joint portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the joint processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 85 as long as it is configured to couple the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. It is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The connection processing by the box connection unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the connection, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening should occur. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85 . When the board box 83 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are separated from each other. and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the connection process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box connection portion 85 . If a history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 83 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of connecting pieces 86 are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces 86 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of connecting pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81. A join process is performed between

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the circuit board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving a trace. Furthermore, an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the sealing sticker, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response wave is removed. A configuration in which wave transmission is disabled may be adopted.

The performance control device 82 is provided with a performance control board that controls a display control device (not shown) as well as voice and lamp display according to instructions from the main control device 81. The performance control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 and configured.

The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, as shown in FIG. The back pack 91 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism part 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover part 94, and includes a tank 95 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and the game balls stored in the tank 95. and a payout device 96 for putting out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 96 . The payout mechanism 92 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power on and off.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the side of the rotation shaft of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when game balls are insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a game is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the main body 12 of the game machine is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when opening/closing execution mode, etc. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state). Through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame side are output to the management control device on the game hall side. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

The controller assembly unit 93 comprises a payout controller 97 and a power supply and launch controller 98 . The payout control device 97 and the power supply and firing control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, the board box of the payout control device 97 may be subjected to fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main controller 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by housing a power supply and launch control board in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the shooting handle 60 is controlled. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be retained and the state at the time of the power failure can be restored when the power failure is restored. It's like

<Flow path forming units 131, 161 and variable winning device 201>
This embodiment is characterized by the passage forming portions 131 and 161, the variable prize winning device 201, and the configuration related thereto. 5 to 7, a supplementary description of the flow path forming units 131 and 161, the variable prize winning device 201, and related configurations will be given below. FIG. 5 is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 4 showing the variable winning device 201 and its peripheral configuration, FIG. 6(a) is a front view of the variable winning device 201, and (b) and (c) are the variable winning devices. 201, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 201 and its peripheral configuration.

First, the left flow path forming portion 131 will be described with reference to FIG. The left flow path forming portion 131 is arranged along the inner rail portion 51 in the left portion of the lower region PE4. As already described, the left flow passage forming portion 131 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 and is configured so that game balls cannot flow down in front of the left flow passage forming portion 131 . The upper surface portion 132 of the left flow path forming portion 131 is a rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and forms a flow path that guides the game ball to the left-right central side of the lower area PE4.

The upper surface portion 132 is formed with steps in the vertical direction, and is divided into a first inclined portion 133 on the upstream side and a second inclined portion 136 on the downstream side. The first inclined portion 133 slopes rightward in a front view, and forms a left first flow path through which the game ball that has flowed down the left area PE2 is led out toward the left game nail group 134 . The left game nail group 134 is composed of a plurality of game nails 38 arranged substantially linearly between the first inclined portion 133 and the lower operation opening 34 arranged above the variable winning device 201. , a guide path capable of guiding the game ball from the first inclined portion 133 to the lower operation opening 34 is formed.

A gap 135 through which one game ball can pass is formed between the first inclined portion 133 and the left game nail group 134 and in the middle position of the left game nail group 134 . A game ball can fall. Under the gap 135, general winning openings 31a and 31b that open upward are arranged, and one game ball can win each of these general winning openings 31a and 31b. A plurality of game pegs 38 are arranged between the gap 135 and the general winning openings 31a and 31b, and the game balls dropped from the gap 135 are randomly distributed by these game pegs 38.例文帳に追加Therefore, the game ball dropped from the gap 135 may or may not win the general winning openings 31a and 31b. In this embodiment, two general prize-winning ports 31 are arranged, but the number of general prize-winning ports 31 is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. .

The second inclined portion 136 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front, and its most downstream portion (end portion) is open toward the variable winning device 201 . The second inclined portion 136 is arranged below the general winning openings 31a and 31b, and serves as a left second flow path for leading game balls that have not won the general winning openings 31a and 31b toward the variable winning device 201. forming.

A first vertical wall portion 137 is formed between the second inclined portion 136 and the first inclined portion 133 to form the step and connect the two inclined portions 133 and 136 . The first vertical wall portion 137 extends in the vertical direction, and between the first vertical wall portion 137 and the general winning opening 31a, a left third flow path through which one game ball can pass is formed. . Therefore, when a game ball dropped from the gap 135 passes through the left side of the general winning opening 31a, the game ball can reach the second inclined portion 136 through the third flow path.

In the present embodiment, the second inclined portion 136 is continuous with the lower end portion of the first vertical wall portion 137, and is the most downstream portion from the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 137 (the end portion on the variable winning device 201 side). It has a configuration in which there is no loophole for game balls such as an out port. Therefore, all the game balls that have passed through the left third channel and the game balls that have fallen onto the second inclined portion 136 are led out to the variable winning device 201 side. In addition, the rolling surfaces of the game ball on the first inclined portion 133 and the second inclined portion 136 are flat without unevenness, and the smooth rolling (flowing down) of the game ball is possible.

In addition, a plurality of game nails 38 are arranged in an area PE4a between the lower operation port 34 and the variable winning device 201 and in an area PE4b between the left game nail group 134 and the variable winning device 201. The game nail 38 is laid out so as to guide the game ball that has flowed into the areas PE4a and PE4b to the variable winning device 201. As shown in FIG. For this reason, the game ball flowing down through the sides of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 and the game ball falling from the gap 135 and flowing into the area PE4b all flow down to the variable winning device 201 side. If the game balls in the areas PE4a and PE4b flow down toward the variable winning device 201, the game nails 38 in these areas may be omitted, or the game nails 38 may be replaced by synthetic resin passage members (guides). member) may be provided.

A second vertical wall portion 138 extending downward (toward the inner rail portion 51) is provided at the most downstream portion of the second inclined portion 136. As shown in FIG. An out port 141 into which a game ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the second vertical wall portion 138, and the game ball that enters the out port 141 is guided to the back side of the game board 24 and is placed in the game area. Ejected from PE. The out port 141 opens in the horizontal direction (right side) of the gaming machine, and its size is such that one game ball can pass through it.

In the front part of the left flow path forming part 131 in the out port 141 and its peripheral part, that is, in the front part of the left flow path forming part 131, at least the out port 141 and the game ball entering the out port 141 A predetermined decoration such as plating or sticker is applied to the portion overlapping from the front of the game machine with respect to the guide passage leading to the back side of the game machine, and the color is applied. On the other hand, the second inclined portion 136 that serves as the rolling surface of the game ball does not have such coloring, and the light transmittance of the portion is lower than that of the second inclined portion 136 . As a result, the opening of the out port 141 and the flow of game balls entering the out port 141 are invisible or difficult to see when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, the out port 141 has a lower visibility than other ball-entering portions (for example, the variable winning device 201) and is inconspicuous.

At that time, a display suggesting or clarifying the out port 141 is provided on the front surface of the left flow path forming portion 131 in the out port 141 and its surrounding portion so that the player, hall staff, etc. can grasp the existence of the out port 141 ( For example, "OUT") may be provided. Instead of coloring the above portion, the portion may be formed of an opaque material or a material having a lower light transmittance than the second inclined portion 136, thereby reducing the visibility of the outlet 141. good.

Incidentally, the left flow path forming portion 131 itself is made of a transparent synthetic resin and has translucency, as already described. Therefore, by arranging a light-emitting substrate mounted with a plurality of light-emitting elements capable of emitting light toward the front of the game machine and to the sides (up, down, left, and right) of the game machine behind the left flow path forming portion 131, , for example, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such as brightly illuminating the second inclined portion 136 .

Next, the right flow path forming portion 161 will be described. The upper surface portion 162 of the right flow path forming portion 161 is a rolling surface on which a game ball can roll, and forms a flow path that guides the game ball to the left-right central side of the lower area PE4. The upper surface portion 162 of the right flow path forming portion 161 is bilaterally symmetrical with the upper surface portion 132 of the left flow path forming portion 131, and has a first inclined portion 163, a second inclined portion 166 and a first vertical wall portion 167. is doing.

The first inclined portion 163 is inclined leftward in a front view, and forms a right first flow path for guiding the game ball that has flowed down the right area PE3 toward the right game nail group 164 . The right game nail group 164 forms a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the lower operation opening 34, and is positioned between the first inclined portion 163 and the right game nail group 164 and in the middle of the right game nail group 164. is formed with a gap 165 through which one game ball can pass. In addition, below the gap 165, general winning holes 31c and 31d that open upward are arranged, and game balls falling from the gap 165 can win the general winning holes 31c and 31d.

The second inclined portion 166 is inclined leftward in a front view, and forms a right second flow path for guiding game balls toward the variable winning device 201 . The second inclined portion 166 is arranged below the general winning openings 31c and 31d, and guides game balls that have not won the general winning openings 31c and 31d to the variable winning device 201. The first vertical wall portion 167 connects the first inclined portion 163 and the second inclined portion 166, and forms a right third flow path through which one game ball can pass between the general winning opening 31d. is doing.

In the present embodiment, the second inclined portion 166 is continuous with the lower end portion of the first vertical wall portion 167, and extends from the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 167 to the terminal end portion (the end portion on the variable winning device 201 side). There is no loophole for game balls such as an out port between them. Therefore, all the game balls that have passed through the right third channel and the game balls that have fallen onto the second inclined portion 166 are led out to the variable winning device 201 side. In addition, the rolling surfaces of the game ball on the first inclined portion 163 and the second inclined portion 166 are flat without unevenness, and the smooth rolling (flowing down) of the game ball is possible.

In the region PE4c between the right game nail group 164 and the variable winning device 201, a plurality of game nails 38 are provided to guide the game balls that have flowed into the region PE4c to the variable winning device 201. All of the game balls that have flowed into the PE 4 c flow down toward the variable winning device 201 . If the game ball in the area PE4c flows down toward the variable winning device 201, the game nail 38 in the area PE4c may be omitted, or a passage member (guide member) made of synthetic resin may be used instead of the game nail 38. You may set it.

A second vertical wall portion 168 extending downward (toward the inner rail portion 51) is provided at the most downstream portion of the second inclined portion 166. As shown in FIG. At the top of the second vertical wall portion 168, an out port 171 for discharging game balls from the game area PE is provided. The out port 171 is open in the horizontal direction (left side) of the gaming machine, and its size is such that one game ball can pass through it. The height position of the out port 171 is the same as that of the out port 141 of the left channel forming portion 131, and the out ports 141 and 171 face each other with the variable winning device 201 interposed therebetween. In addition, in the out port 171, as in the case of the out port 141, the front surface of the right flow path forming portion 161 in the out port 171 and its peripheral portion is made opaque, thereby improving the visibility from the front of the gaming machine. lower than the bulb. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, no outlets other than the outlets 141 and 171 are provided.

Next, the variable winning device 201 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6( a ), an opening 207 is provided at the lowest position on the game board 24 so as to pass through the game board 24 in the thickness direction. The variable winning device 201 has a plate-like base body 211 and is attached to the game board 24 by fitting the base body 211 into the opening 207 .

The distance between the front part 211a of the base body 211 and the window panel 62 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a passage part 208 through which the game ball can pass is formed in front of the front part 211a. there is The passage portion 208 includes a side wall portion 213 composed of the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the passage forming portions 131 and 161, and a bottom portion 214 composed of the inner rail portion 51. A large winning opening 202 is formed in the upper portion (see FIG. 7(b)). The prize winning opening 202 is open upward and has a horizontally long rectangular shape extending left and right in a plan view. The size (width dimension) of the big winning opening 202 is such that a plurality of game balls can pass through at the same time.

A through hole 222 is formed through the base body 211 in the thickness direction at the center of the lower portion of the passage portion 208 . The through-hole 222 has a horizontally long, substantially elliptical shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that allows a plurality of game balls to pass through at the same time. As shown in FIG. 6( b ), a ball passage 221 is provided on the rear side of the base body 211 , and the ball passage 221 communicates with the passage portion 208 through a through hole 222 . The ball passage 221 extends rearward, and the game ball reaching the ball passage 221 is guided rearward along the passage bottom surface 221a. A winning sensor 202a for the big winning opening for detecting a game ball that has won the big winning opening 202 is arranged in the middle position. The big winning opening winning sensor 202a is electrically connected to the main control device 81, and when the game ball passes through the detection area of the big winning opening winning sensor 202a, predetermined detection information (detection signal) is sent to the main controller. Input to device 81 . Based on this detection information, the main controller 81 determines whether or not there is a prize in the big prize opening 202 .

A plate-shaped shutter 216 as an opening/closing door 203 is arranged so as to cover the big prize winning opening 202 . The shutter 216 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and has a protruding position that protrudes forward from the front surface portion 211a of the base body 211 (the front surface of the game board 24) toward the front of the game machine, and a position that retracts backward from the protruding position. , and a retracted position where projection forward of the game machine is suppressed.

When the shutter 216 is located at the retracted position, as shown in FIG. 7(b), a receiving area RA is formed in the upper portion of the passage portion 208 so that the game ball can be received into the big winning opening 202. As shown in FIG. The receiving area RA is located at the same position and has the same shape and size as the big winning opening 202 in a plan view. be. At the retracted position, the front end portion of the shutter 216 is flush with the front surface portion 211a of the base body 211 or positioned closer to the back side of the gaming machine than the front surface portion 211a. This not only allows the game ball to pass in front of the shutter 216 at the retracted position, but also prevents the game ball from being caught on the boundary between the base body 211 and the shutter 216, ensuring a smooth flow of the game ball. It is

On the other hand, when the shutter 216 is positioned at the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 7A, the receiving area RA disappears by covering the big winning opening 202 with the shutter 216 from above. As a result, the variable winning device 201 is closed, and the winning of game balls into the big winning opening 202 is restricted. It should be noted that it is not necessary to have a structure in which game balls cannot enter the big winning hole 202 when it is in the closed state, and it may be possible to win a prize within a range where it is difficult to win a prize compared to the open state. In short, it is sufficient if the easiness of winning to the big prize opening 202 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

Here, as shown in FIG. 6(a), the height positions of the left and right ends 216a and 216b of the shutter 216 are at least 1 It is set at a position that is lowered by the size of one piece. In other words, on both left and right sides of the shutter 216, a stepped portion 204 is formed so that the left and right ends 216a, 216b of the shutter 216 are lower than the second inclined portions 136, 166 by at least the diameter of the game ball. . The out ports 141 and 171 are arranged in these stepped portions 204 so as to open toward the shutter 216 side. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the shutter 216 positioned at the projecting position, the game ball is guided to the out ports 141 and 171 by the shutter 216 .

The shutter 216 is provided with a guiding function of guiding game balls to the out ports 141 and 171. - 特許庁Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, a first shutter inclined portion 217 inclined downward toward the outlet 141 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the shutter 216, and the first shutter inclined portion 217 is provided on the right side of the top surface. is provided with a second shutter inclined portion 218 inclined downward toward the out port 171 . These inclined portions 217 and 218 are bilaterally symmetrical, and the game ball reaching the upper surface of the shutter 216 is guided to the out ports 141 and 171 by the inclined portions 217 and 218 . It should be noted that the shutter 216 as a whole does not necessarily need to be tilted, and at least the upper surface portion thereof should be tilted.

The shutter 216 extends in the left-right direction, and more specifically, the left and right ends 216a, 216b thereof are located near the second vertical wall portions 138, 168 of the flow path forming portions 131, 161, respectively. The distance between the left and right ends 216a, 216b of the shutter 216 and the respective out ports 141, 171 is less than the diameter of the game ball, and the game can be played from between the shutter 216 positioned at the projecting position and the respective out ports 141, 171. Balls are prevented from falling. Therefore, all the game balls guided toward the out ports 141 and 171 by the shutter 216 enter the out ports 141 and 171 unless the shutter 216 is displaced to the retracted position during guidance.

In addition, when the shutter 216 is located at the retracted position, the game balls enter the out ports 141 and 171 in principle, except when an event such as a change in the flowing direction of the game balls occurs due to contact between the game balls. don't ball

As shown in FIGS. 6(b) and 6(c), a variable winning drive unit 219 for driving the shutter 216 is attached to the rear side of the base body 211. As shown in FIG. The variable winning drive unit 219 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force from the solenoid to the shutter 216 . The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81 . By driving the solenoid, the shutter 216 retreats from the protruded position to the retracted position, and the variable winning device 201 switches from the closed state to the open state. When the drive signal output from the main controller 81 stops, the shutter 216 advances from the retracted position to the projecting position by the biasing force of the biasing means (such as a spring), and the variable winning device 201 switches from the open state to the closed state.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111 . The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 81 .

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 112 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 115 provided in the main controller 81 and a payout controller 97 . In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115 , and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115 .

Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112 . Various sensors include the general winning opening 31, the upper working opening 33, the lower working opening 34, the through gate 35, the general winning opening winning sensor 31e for detecting the winning of the variable winning device 201, the upper working opening winning sensor 33b, A prize winning sensor 34c for the lower opening, a prize winning sensor 35a for through, a prize winning sensor 202a for large prize opening, and the like are provided. In the MPU 112, based on the detection results of these various sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 35a, and 202a, winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section is performed. In addition, the MPU 112 executes a jackpot generating lottery based on winnings to the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, and executes a support generating lottery based on winnings to the through gate 35. - 特許庁

An output side of the MPU 112 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97, for example, based on the winning determination result to the prize ball corresponding ball entry portion corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands for effects are output to the effect control device 82 . Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

In addition, an electric accessory drive section 34b and a variable winning drive section 219 are connected to the output side of the MPU 112 as various drive sections. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the MPU 112 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 219 so that the big winning opening 202 is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the MPU 112 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at each game round, the MPU 112 executes display control of the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS in the main display portion 43, and the main display portion is displayed in the open/close execution mode of the variable winning device 201. The display control of the round display part RS in 43 is executed. Then, when the lottery result as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a is specified, the MPU 112 performs display control of the accessory display section 44. FIG.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 112. Through this external output terminal 99, information on ball entry to various ball entry sections and jackpot information is sent to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. Information related to the lottery result such as is output. As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped by the hall computer HC.

The blackout monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power and launch control 98 and also monitors the output of the power and launch control 98 at a stable 24 volt DC voltage. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Power for storing data is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81 .

Further, the power supply and shooting control device 98 is responsible for shooting control of the game ball shooting mechanism 53, and the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 54 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the launch rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 54 toward the guide rail 54, and the game ball is fired by supplying a drive signal from the power supply and launch control device 98 to the solenoid fired.

Effect control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, display light emitting portion 63 and speaker portion provided in each holding light emitting portion 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the front door frame 14 64 and controls the display control device 212 .

An MPU 242 is mounted on a performance control board 241 provided in the performance control device 82 . The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242 . From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command is received. It also receives game round control commands (game round control information) such as variation commands, type commands, and variation end commands. It also receives open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as an opening command, a closing command, an opening command, and an ending command.

The MPU 242 performs processing for executing various effects based on various commands received from the main control device 81 . The received command is stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 . Then, processing such as analysis of the stored command is performed, and various effects are executed. The ROM 243 of the MPU 242 is provided with various table storage areas, and the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 is provided with various flag storage areas and various counter areas. It is possible to do

The output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the holding light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided to the front door frame 14, and the display control device 212 is connected.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 271 on which are mounted an MPU 272 in which a program ROM 273 and a work RAM 274 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 275, a character ROM 276, and a video RAM 277. there is

The MPU 272 receives, from the effect control device 82, a pending display control command (holding display control information) for holding display control, a game round control command (game round control information) for performing variable display of symbols, It receives an opening/closing execution mode command (opening/closing execution mode information) for displaying moving images during the opening/closing execution mode. Then, it analyzes the received commands or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 275 (specifically, to generate an internal command for the VDP 275).

The program ROM 273 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 272 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images.

The work RAM 274 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 272 executes various programs. These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM 274 .

The VDP 275 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . Since the VDP 275 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 275 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 272 and the video RAM 277 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 276 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 276 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 276 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 276 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 276 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 273 .

The video RAM 277 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 277, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9(a) to (j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of a sub pattern. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 is set with three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. On the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the display screen G is designed so that three symbols are statically displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3×3 are statically displayed. It is designed to be

In addition, the display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a downward-sloping line L4, and an upward-sloping line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a big win moving image is displayed as a result of the big win.

In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a probability variable jackpot result occurs, the same combination of specific symbols appears stopped. Also, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. be.

The pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner, and is not limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate.

In the lower left part of the display screen G, a first reserved display area Ga is set, and in the lower right part of the display screen G, a second reserved display area Gb is set.

In the first reservation display area (non-priority side reservation display area) Ga, the same number of unit reservation display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball enters the upper operation port 33 are arranged in the horizontal direction. It is divided and displayed as follows. Specifically, the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 is 4, and correspondingly, the first unit reservation display area Ga1, the second A unit reserved display area Ga2, a third unit reserved display area Ga3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 33 is 1, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the game ball enters the upper operation opening 33 When the number of pending prizes is 4, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Ga1 to the fourth unit pending display area Ga4.

In addition, in the second reservation display area (priority side reservation display area) Gb, the same number of unit reservation display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 34 are arranged side by side in the left and right direction. It is divided and displayed so that it is displayed. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved when the game ball has won the lower operation opening 34 is four, corresponding to the second reserved display area Gb, the first unit reserved display area Gb1, the second A unit reserved display area Gb2, a third unit reserved display area Gb3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations when the game ball enters the lower operation opening 34 is 1, the reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the lower operation opening 34. When the number of pending items is four, the pending images are displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Gb1 to the fourth unit pending display area Gb4.

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lotteries in MPU 112 of Main Control Unit 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 112 of the main control unit 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

During the game, the MPU 112 uses various types of counter information to set the jackpot generation lottery, set the display of the main display section 43, set the contents of the effect of the pattern display device 41, set the display of the accessory display section 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and the pattern display device 41 deviate and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter for determining the fluctuation display time in the main display unit 43 and the pattern display device 41 and CS are used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 is to be in the electric role open state.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114 . In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS, when a prize is won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34, It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as acquired information storage means.

The reserved ball storage area 114b includes a reserved area RE including a first result display section reserved area Ra and a second result display section reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reservation areas Ra and Rb are provided with a first area, a second area, a third area and a fourth area, respectively. Each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS stored in 114a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first area → second area → third area → fourth area Each numerical information is stored chronologically in order of area. Since four areas are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are retained and stored. In addition, the total number of reserved balls storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 114b, and in the total number of reserved numbers storage area, the number of winning histories to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 is specified. Information for doing is stored.

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display on the main display section 43, and when starting one game cycle, the execution area AE is moved. Based on the various numerical information stored in the .

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34.例文帳に追加More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 33, and the second result displaying portion of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working port 34. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

The values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 113a as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 113 . As the right/wrong table, a right/wrong table for the low-probability mode (low-probability right/wrong information group) and a right/wrong table for the high-probability mode (high-probability right/wrong information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode of the lottery means. In each success/failure table, the value of the random number is set so that the success/failure table for the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the success/failure table for the low-probability mode.

In addition, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a wrong result except for the value of the random number that wins the jackpot.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are based on two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning/failure lottery means after the end of the opening/closing execution mode; It is set by making a difference.

As the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34, when compared with the situation where the game ball is continued to be shot in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of opening state per unit time is relatively high or low ) are set.

Specifically, in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role product opening lottery using the electric role product opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 1/2). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode. A long time is set. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the closing from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It is

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower operation opening 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper working port 33 is higher than the lower working port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is more likely to be won than the upper working port 33. Higher chance of winning. When a prize is awarded to the lower operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. be able to.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by changing any one condition or any combination of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability.

The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening . More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 33, and the second result displaying portion of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working port 34. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 113b as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 113. FIG.

In this embodiment, as the types of jackpot results, a normal jackpot result and a probability variable jackpot result are set. The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

The variable probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery results in the win/fail lottery result in winning the big win state and the game shifts to the big win state accordingly.

The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.例文帳に追加More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 33, and the second result displaying portion of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working port 34. is stored in the reservation area Rb. Then, whether or not to generate reach is determined based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 113 . However, in the game round in which the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the MPU 112 determines whether or not to generate a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Although the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, it may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach indication may be set larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the ready-to-win display (ready-to-win state) is provided with a pattern display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns). In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result, the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the pattern (picture) in the pattern display device 41 is started. , means a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established. It is a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to terminating the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on a preset effective line within the display screen of the symbol display device 41. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying combinations of possible ready-to-win patterns, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 10 will be described. First, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are started to be displayed at high speed. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which pattern is displayed. After that, the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display in which the player can easily recognize the displayed symbols. Then, when the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed variation display to the low speed variation display. After that, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed by stop-displaying main symbols with the same number on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. Then, when the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display and the open/close execution mode occurs, the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are attached. is stop-displayed on the reach line, and the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. It includes those that perform production, and those that perform ready-to-win production by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after displaying a combination of ready-to-win symbols in a reduced size or not. Also, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, whether or not to perform the advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. may

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 112 to determine the variation display time in the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS of the main display portion 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. be done. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 33, and the second result displaying portion of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower working port 34. is stored in the reservation area Rb.

The electric accessary product release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to open state.

The MPU 112 uses the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE to determine the variation display time in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. A variable display time table storage area 113c is used. Also, in the MPU 112, using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the stop result in the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS is determined. However, the stop result table storage area of the ROM 113 is used for the determination.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 to advance the game will be described. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 112 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 35a, and 202a are read, the states of the various detection sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, 35a, and 202a are determined, and the detection information is stored. . In addition, when the winning of game balls is detected by various detection sensors 31e, 33b, 34c, and 202a corresponding to the generation of prize balls, a prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out prize balls is generated. Sets the sphere command. For example, when a winning to the variable winning device 201 is detected by the winning sensor 202a for the big winning opening, a prize ball command for designating 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls, is set. In subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 114. FIG.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. In the prize-winning process for through, if a prize has been won to the through-gate 35, the number of stored role-things stored in the power reserve area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). On this condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric role holding area 114c. In addition, the production control device 82 executes a process for lighting the third pending light-emitting portion 47 corresponding to the number of stored character product pending storage.

After that, in step S105, after executing the prize winning process for the operation port, this timer interrupt process is terminated. In the prize winning process for the operating port, based on the fact that a game ball has entered one of the operating ports 33, 34, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is set based on the winning, and a jackpot random number counter is set. Information acquisition processing for storing each value of C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and variation type counter CS is performed.

In the information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the upper working port 33 (start winning). When winning the upper working port 33, the number of pending information stored in the first result display holding area Ra is grasped, and the grasped number is set as the first start holding storage number RaN. . On the other hand, when the game ball has not entered the upper operation opening 33, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower operation opening 34 (start winning). When winning the lower operation port 34, the number of pending information stored in the second result display holding area Rb is grasped, and the grasped number is set as the second start holding storage number RbN. . Then, it is determined whether or not the set start pending memory number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). When the number N of starting pending memories is less than the upper limit value, the number N of starting pending memories in the corresponding result display holding area is updated to be increased by one. And when the first start pending memory number RaN is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first result display holding area Ra is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas, and when the second start pending storage number RbN is set, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS Each value is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display section reservation area Rb. After that, for the effect control device 82, a process for lighting the first suspension light emitting unit 45 or the second suspension light emitting unit 46 corresponding to the start suspension storage number is executed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S206 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed during the remaining time.

In the normal process, first, an external signal output process is executed in step S201. In the external signal output process of step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97 . Moreover, when the command for production|presentation is set, it is transmitted with respect to the production|presentation control apparatus 82. - 特許庁

Next, in step S202, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114 .

In the subsequent step S203, a game round control process is executed to advance the game of each game round. In this game round control process, determination of winning or not of a big win and allocation of the big win types are performed, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, setting of variable display by the main display unit 43, and the like are performed.

After executing the game round control process of step S203, the process proceeds to step S204, and the game state transition process is executed. By this game state transition processing, the game state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode or the like. Details of the game round control process in step S203 and the game state transition process in step S204 will be described later.

In the subsequent step S205, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is executed. In this electric role support process, numerical information obtained from the electric role product release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 114c of the RAM 114 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric role product 34a. A lottery is performed, and when the electric role open state is won, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 34a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role opening lottery.

After that, in step S206, game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 98. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In subsequent step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 114 . The power failure flag is set when the occurrence of power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 115 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114 . Further, in step S210, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag has been set, it means that a power failure has occurred, so the power failure processing from step S211 onwards is executed. That is, in step S211, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S212 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and in step S213 access to the RAM 114 is prohibited. continues in an infinite loop until it can no longer run.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, the game round control process of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game round control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 114 e of the RAM 114 . The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

When it is in the open/close execution mode, the process after step S302, that is, the game round start process of steps S303 to S305 and the game round progress process of steps S306 to S309 are not executed. Terminate the turn control process. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

If the open/close execution mode is not in progress, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display section 43 is in variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in the process of variable display. Note that this determination is made by determining whether or not the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 stores a flag during variable display. The flag during variable display is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

If the main display unit 43 is not displaying the variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start processing of steps S303 to S305. In the game cycle start process, first, in step S303, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN, which is the sum of the starting pending memory numbers of the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS, is "0". When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN for both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are "0". Therefore, the game round control process is terminated as it is.

If the common pending number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb is set for variable display in step S304. After executing the data setting process of step S305 and executing the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 43 and the fluctuation display on the pattern display device 41 in step S305, the game round control process is ended. In the variation start process, the winning lottery is executed based on the data (holding information) set in the data setting process, and the stop result is determined so that the game round ends with the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery. Make settings. Also, the variation display time of the game round to be executed this time is set based on the variation type counter CS and the like. In addition, in the variation start process, a variation command including information on the game result and a type command including information on the variation display time are sent to the effect control device 82 so that an effect corresponding to the game round to be executed this time is performed. Set output. Variation commands and type commands are transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S201 in normal processing (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 transmits the received command to the display control device 212 while maintaining its information format. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 and the like so as to start the performance of the game round.

When the main display unit 43 is in the process of the variable display, the process for progressing the game cycle of steps S306 to S309 is executed. In the game round progress processing, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of RAM 114 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable start process at the start of the game cycle. Also, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the result display section (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display section related to the current game round. , ends this game round control process.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S308. In the fluctuation end process, the information set based on the result of the lottery in the fluctuation start process is specified, and the main display part 43 is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the main display part 43. do.

In the subsequent step S309, a fluctuation end command is set. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The fluctuation end command set at step S309 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The performance control device 82 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 receives the variation end command to confirm and display (final stop display) the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S204 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 15 and 16 and the like.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S402, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variable display of the pattern in the first result display portion AS or the second result display portion BS of one game cycle has ended. If it is not the timing at which the variable display ends, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S403 whether or not the game result of the current game round corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

If it corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, a process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S404. In the start process, it is checked whether the variable winning device 201 is closed before the open/close execution mode is started. In the open/close execution mode start process, an opening period setting process for waiting without starting the opening of the variable winning device 201 at the start of the open/close execution mode is executed. In the processing for setting the opening period, waiting time information for opening stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 . The value of the timer counter T is decremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec cycle, each time timer interrupt processing is started).

In the subsequent step S405, as a round display start process, the number of rounds of the opening/closing execution mode to be executed this time ("15" in any jackpot result in this embodiment) is displayed in the round display section RS of the main display section 43. to control.

In the subsequent step S406, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The content of this effect includes the display mode in the pattern display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82 so that display (for example, moving image display) corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode of this time is performed.

Then, in step S407, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 generates a jackpot in the management control device. you can figure out what you did.

On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether or not the standby time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. When the waiting time for opening has passed, the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S409. Here, the processing for opening and closing the big winning opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 201 is in an open state and the big winning opening 202 is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 219 . When the big winning opening 202 is not opened, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" at step S502, and whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" at step S503. judge.

When the value of the round counter RC is "0" or when the value of the timer counter T is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter T is "0", the process proceeds to step S504, and the variable winning drive unit 219 is activated to open the variable winning device 201. Drive state.

In the subsequent step S505, a round opening time setting process is executed. In the open time setting process, "15000" (30 sec) corresponding to the upper limit open time (upper limit open period) of the round is input to the timer counter T.

In the subsequent step S506, a process for setting the maximum winning number for each round is performed. In the processing for setting the upper limit number of prizes to be won for each round, the process of inputting "10" corresponding to the upper limit number of prizes to the prize counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is performed.

Then, in step S507, an opening command is set, and the main opening/closing process ends. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each round based on the received open command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

Also, when the variable winning device 201 is in the open state in step S501, the process proceeds to step S508, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0". When the value of the timer counter T is not "0", it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the variable winning device 201 in step S509 based on the detection state of the winning sensor 202a for the big winning opening. If no prize has been won, the main opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a prize has been won, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S510, and then it is determined in step S511 whether or not the value of the prize counter PC is "0". If not, the main opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the timer counter T is "0" at step S508 and the upper limit opening time has elapsed, or if the value of the winning counter PC is "0" at step S511 and the maximum winning number has been won, , means that the end condition of the round is satisfied. In such a case, at step S512, the variable winning driving section 219 is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the variable winning device 201. FIG.

In the subsequent step S513, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1, and the process of updating the round counter RC is executed. Subsequently, in step S514, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0".

If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", in step S515, the closing time is set between rounds, that is, the closing time from the open state to the closed state until the variable winning device 201 is opened again. Execute the process. In the closing time setting process, a process of inputting "2000" (4 sec) corresponding to the waiting time (interval) between rounds to the timer counter T is performed.

After that, in step S516, a closing command is set, and the main opening/closing process ends. The closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the interval of the round game based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S514 that the value of the round counter RC is "0", ending processing is executed in step S517. In the start process, an ending waiting time is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the timer counter T is set with waiting time information for the ending pre-stored in the ROM 113 . In this embodiment, the waiting time for ending is set to be 5 seconds, and in step S517, a process of inputting "2500" to the timer counter T is performed.

After that, in step S518, after setting the ending command, the opening/closing process ends. The ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 at step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). A performance control device 82 determines the content of performance corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined performance is executed.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 15), after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S409, it is determined in step S410 whether or not the round counter RC is "0". If the value of the round counter RC is not "0", the game state transition processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is "0", it is determined by the timer counter T whether or not the waiting time for the ending has expired in step S411. If the waiting time for the ending has not ended, the game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the waiting time for the ending has ended, a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S412.

In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/failure lottery mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode are set. Specifically, when the trigger of the opening/closing execution mode this time is the probability variable jackpot result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, resulting in the normal jackpot result. If there is, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode limited to the number of times.

Then, in step S413, the process for ending the display of the round display section RS is executed, and in step S414, after executing the opening/closing execution mode end process, the game state transition process is ended. In the closing process of the opening/closing execution mode, transition to the opening/closing execution mode and erasure of various counters and flags used during the opening/closing execution mode are performed.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow in each of the normal game state (game state other than the opening/closing execution mode) and the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the normal game state, and FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the opening/closing execution mode.

First, the game flow in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. When the game ball that has flowed down the left region PE2 (see FIG. 4) reaches the left flow passage forming portion 131, the game ball descends along the first inclined portion 133 of the left flow passage forming portion 131 to reach the left game nail group. 134. When the game ball jumps over the gap 135 between the first inclined portion 133 and the left game nail group 134 , the game ball is guided toward the lower operation opening 34 by the left game nail group 134 . When the game ball crosses over the left game nail group 134, if the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, the game ball enters the lower operation opening 34, and if the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. , the game ball falls toward the variable prize winning device 201 without winning the lower operation port 34. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when a game ball falls from the gap 135 between the first inclined portion 133 and the left game nail group 134 or the gap 135 provided in the middle of the left game nail group 134, the game ball wins a general prize. It is guided above the openings 31a, 31b or the general winning openings 31a, 31b. When the game balls enter the general winning openings 31a and 31b, the winning is detected by the general winning opening winning sensor 31e, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out. On the other hand, when the game ball dropped from the gap 135 does not enter the general winning openings 31a and 31b, the game ball is formed between the first vertical wall portion 137 and the general winning opening 31a. By passing through the third flow path or passing through between the general winning opening 31 a and the general winning opening 31 b , it drops onto the second inclined portion 136 of the left flow path forming portion 131 .

As already explained, the second inclined portion 136 has a loophole for game balls such as an out port between the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 137 and the end portion (the end portion on the variable winning device 201 side). Since the configuration is such that it does not, all the game balls dropped onto the second inclined portion 136 are led out to the variable winning device 201 side. Then, the game ball led out to the variable winning device 201 side falls on the upper surface of the shutter 216 which is positioned at the projecting position and closes the big winning opening 202, and each inclined portion 217 provided on the shutter 216. , 218 to the outlets 141, 171. Here, since the distance between the left and right end portions 216a, 216b of the shutter 216 and the second vertical wall portions 138, 168 of the left flow path forming portion 131 is less than the diameter of the game ball, the ball rolls on the shutter 216. The game ball does not drop from between the shutter 216 and the second vertical wall parts 138, 168, and both enter the out ports 141, 171. - 特許庁

Also, in the area PE4b between the left game nail group 134 and the variable winning device 201, the game nails 38 are arranged so as to guide the game balls that have flowed into the area PE4b to the variable winning device 201. FIG. Therefore, even if the game ball passing through the gap 135 does not reach the second inclined portion 136 , the game ball is guided to the variable winning device 201 and falls onto the shutter 216 . Then, as in the case described above, it rolls on the shutter 216 and is guided to the out ports 141 and 171 .

A game ball is launched so as to flow down the right area PE3 (see FIG. 4), and when the game ball that has flowed down the right area PE3 reaches the right flow path forming portion 161, the game ball moves to the right flow path forming portion. The first inclined portion 163 of 161 leads out toward the right gaming nail group 164 . Also in this case, if the game ball does not reach the right game nail group 164, or if it falls from the gap 165 provided in the middle of the right game nail group 164, the game ball is dropped from the general winning openings 31c, 31d or It is guided above the general winning openings 31c and 31d.

Then, the game balls that did not win the general winning openings 31c and 31d pass through the right third channel formed between the first vertical wall portion 167 and the general winning opening 31d, or pass through the general winning opening 31c. It falls onto the second inclined portion 166 of the right channel forming portion 161 by passing through the general prize winning opening 31d. Also in the second inclined portion 166, there is no loophole for game balls such as an out port between the connection portion with the first vertical wall portion 167 and the end portion (the end portion on the side of the variable winning device 201). All the game balls dropped onto the inclined portion 166 are led out to the variable winning device 201 side and dropped onto the upper surface of the shutter 216 .

Also, even when a game ball flows into the region PE4c between the right game nail group 164 and the variable winning device 201, it is led out to the variable winning device 201 side by the game nail 38 arranged in the region PE4c, and the upper surface of the shutter 216 fall on top. Furthermore, although it reaches the vicinity of the upper operation opening 33 and the lower operation opening 34, the game ball that does not win any of these operation openings 33, 34 and flows into the area PE4a is also led out to the variable winning device 201 side, It falls on the upper surface of shutter 216 .

Thus, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through any of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3, the game that did not win the upper operation opening 33, the lower operation opening 34 and the general winning openings 31a to 31d All the spheres are concentrated in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 201 . When the shutter 216 is in the projecting position and the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state, the aggregated game balls fall on the shutter 216 and are guided to the out ports 141 and 171 by the shutter 216.例文帳に追加

Next, the game flow in the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. The flow until the game balls flowing down the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3 are concentrated in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 201 is the same as in the case of the normal game state, so the explanation is omitted.

As already described, when the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning device 201 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then switching control (opening/closing control) from the open state to the closed state is performed at least once (this embodiment 15 times). In the open state of the variable winning device 201, the receiving area RA (see FIG. 7B) capable of receiving the game ball into the big winning opening 202 is formed by positioning the shutter 216 at the retracted position. Winning of game balls to is allowed. On the other hand, in the closed state, the receiving area RA disappears due to the shutter 216 being positioned at the projecting position, and winning of game balls into the big winning opening 202 is restricted.

Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the second inclined portions 136 and 166 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 and the game balls that have flowed down to the regions PE4a to PE4c are placed in the region where the receiving region RA is formed. It is configured to be aggregated into Therefore, when the game balls reach the forming area of the receiving area RA in the state where the shutter 216 is in the retracted position (the state in which the variable winning device 201 is in the open state), all the game balls enter the receiving area RA. It flows in and wins the big prize opening 202 (flows into the passage portion 208). As a result, the occurrence of out balls is suppressed, and the game balls can be efficiently won in the variable prize winning device 201.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the game ball reaches the formation area of the receiving area RA in the situation where the shutter 216 is in the protruding position (the situation in which the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state), the game ball is released as in the case of the normal game state. It drops onto the shutter 216 and is guided to the out ports 141 and 171 .

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Of the game balls flowing down the game area PE, the game balls that did not enter the other ball entry portions (upper operation port 33, lower operation port 34, general winning ports 31a to 31d) on the upstream side of the variable winning device 201 to a predetermined area (the area where the receiving area RA is formed). In this case, when the player sees the flow of game balls gathering in a predetermined area, when the variable winning device 201 is switched to the open state, the variable winning device 201 has the impression that the game balls can be efficiently won. be able to give.

In addition, the left flow passage forming portion 131 and the right flow passage forming portion 161 are provided, and regardless of which region of the left region PE2 or the right region PE3 the game ball flows down, it is configured to be led out to the predetermined region as described above. As a result, the flow of game balls gathering in a predetermined area can be generated on a daily basis, not limited to a special game state such as right-hand hitting. That is, when the player always sees the above flow, the awareness that the variable prize winning device 201 is likely to win efficiently is promoted, and the enjoyment of generating the open/close execution mode can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable winning device 201 is in the closed state, it is configured to guide the game balls drawn to the predetermined area to the out ports 141 and 171 . In this case, the game balls collected in the predetermined area in the normal game state can be appropriately released outside the game area PE. Thereby, it is suppressed that the game ball stays in the predetermined area, and ball clogging in the predetermined area and its surrounding area is suppressed. For example, if ball clogging occurs frequently in these areas, the chances of having the clogged ball cleared by the staff of the game hall increase, making the player feel annoyed, or creating a flow of game balls contrary to the design intent. However, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

A left channel forming portion 131 and a right channel forming portion 161 are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 24, and a variable winning device 201 is arranged between these channel forming portions 131 and 161. FIG. In this case, it is possible to set a predetermined area where the game balls are concentrated between the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, and it is possible to bring the game balls closer to the left and right central portions of the lower area PE4. As a result, for example, compared to the case where the predetermined area is set at the left corner or the right corner of the game board 24, the flow of game balls gathering in the predetermined area can be constructed at a place where the player can easily see it. Become. In addition, since the variable winning device 201 is positioned between the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, the positional relationship between the three makes it possible for the game ball to reach the variable winning device 201 even if the player does not actually see the flow of the game ball. It is possible to give an impression that people are likely to gather, and it is possible to suitably arouse the desire to play.

The first inclined portions 133, 163 are provided in the flow path forming portions 131, 161, the game balls are led out above the general winning openings 31a to 31d, and then the game balls that did not win the general winning openings 31a to 31d are removed. It is configured to lead to the variable winning device 201 . For example, if the configuration is such that the game ball wins a prize too efficiently to the variable prize winning device 201, the processing load inside the gaming machine for winning a prize increases, which may hinder the operation of the gaming machine. In this regard, in this configuration, by constructing a flow of game balls so as to approach the variable winning device 201 after approaching the general winning ports 31a to 31d, the number of game balls reaching the variable winning device 201 is reduced and the variable It is possible to prevent the number of prizes awarded to the prize winning device 201 from becoming excessive. At this time, since the general winning ports 31a to 31d are used, the frequency of winning to the variable winning device 201 can be reduced while the game balls are being paid out. Therefore, compared to the case of reducing the frequency of winning to the variable winning device 201 by, for example, guiding the game ball to the out port, it becomes easier to obtain the understanding of the player, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the desire to play. .

The configuration is such that the out ports 141 and 171 are arranged on the side of the shutter 216 . In this case, the flow of the game ball on the shutter 216 at the projecting position can be used to guide the game ball to the out ports 141, 171, and the shutter 216 can be utilized as a guide passage to the out ports 141, 171. Become. Moreover, since the distance between the shutter 216 and the out ports 141, 171 is less than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball is prevented from falling downward from between the shutter 216 and the out ports 141, 171.例文帳に追加As a result, a separate guide path for guiding the game ball from the shutter 216 to the out ports 141, 171 is not required, and the game ball guide path to the out ports 141, 171 can be simplified.

<Modification 1 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, the configurations of the second inclined portions 136, 166 in the flow path forming portions 131, 161 and the variable winning device 201 are different from those of the first embodiment. The configurations of the second inclined portions 136 and 166 and the variable prize winning device 201 according to this modified example will be described below with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19 , out ports 231 and 232 are provided in the second inclined portions 136 and 166 in this modified example. Each out port 231, 232 is open upward, and one game ball can pass therethrough.

The out ports 231, 232 are provided in the middle positions of the rolling surfaces of the game balls in the second inclined portions 136, 166. Specifically, the most upstream portions of the second inclined portions 136, 166, that is, the second It is provided at the end on the 1 vertical wall portion 137, 167 side. Therefore, the game balls passing through the respective third flow paths formed between the first vertical wall portions 137, 167 and the general winning openings 31a, 31d can enter the out ports 141, 171. Become. By the way, the ratio of the game balls flowing into the third flow path among the game balls flowing down the game area PE is small, so in this modification, the operation ports 33, 34 and the general winning ports 31a to 31d do not win Substantially all (almost) of the game balls are led out to the arrangement area of the variable winning device 201 .

Thus, by providing the out ports 231, 232 at intermediate positions of the second inclined portions 136, 166, the game ball can be discharged from the game area PE in the process of leading the game ball toward the variable winning device 201. become a thing. Therefore, compared to the first embodiment in which the game balls are drawn uniformly toward the variable prize winning device 201, it becomes difficult to predict the direction of the game balls, and it is possible to improve the attention to the flow of the game balls. be possible.

In the modified example described above, the out ports 231 and 232 are provided at the most upstream portions of the second inclined portions 136 and 166, but the location of the out ports 231 and 232 is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide it at an intermediate position between the most upstream portion and the most downstream portion of the second inclined portions 136 and 166 . Incidentally, the closer the out ports 231 and 232 are to the most downstream portions of the second inclined portions 136 and 166, the higher the rate of game balls entering the out ports 231 and 232 can be. That is, the out ports 231 and 232 can be utilized as adjustment means for adjusting the arrival rate of game balls to the variable winning device 201 .

Further, in the above modified example, the second inclined portion 136 of the left flow passage forming portion 131 and the second inclined portion 166 of the right flow passage forming portion 161 are each provided with an out port. , 166 may be provided with an out port. Furthermore, each of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 or the first inclined portions 133 and 163 of one of the flow path forming portions is provided with an out port that opens upward, or the first vertical wall portions 137 and 167 are provided with lateral ( You may provide the out opening|mouth which opens in the left-right center side of lower side area|region PE4.

Next, the variable winning device 201 according to this modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, the configuration of the shutter 216 is characteristic of the variable winning device 201 according to this modified example.

In this modification, the variable winning device 201 is provided with deceleration means for reducing the moving speed when the game ball moves on the shutter 216 . Specifically, the upper surface 216c of the shutter 216 is provided with a plurality of ridges 215 extending in a direction intersecting with the moving direction of the game ball. Each protruding line portion 215 protrudes upward from the upper surface portion 216c of the shutter 216, and has a columnar shape with a semicircular cross section that protrudes upward. These ridges 215 are arranged so as to line up in the movement direction of the game ball on the shutter 216 (horizontal direction of the gaming machine), and are arranged at predetermined intervals.

By providing such a deceleration means, when a game ball is placed on the upper surface portion 216c of the shutter 216, the game ball moving toward the out ports 141 and 171 is decelerated, and the game ball stays on the shutter 216. period is lengthened. As a result, when the game ball reaches the shutter 216 in the standby period (period in which the variable winning device 201 is closed) between round games, before the game ball crosses over the shutter 216 The probability that the next round game is started (the variable winning device 201 is switched to the open state) increases. In other words, not only the game balls reaching the variable winning device 201 at the timing when the variable winning device 201 is in the open state, but also the game balls reaching the variable winning device 201 during the standby period are awarded to the big winning opening 202. is possible, and more efficient prize winning can be expected. In addition, since the protruding portion 215 functions to impede the flow of the game ball on the shutter 216, it can also be called an impeding portion or an obstructing portion.

<Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration are different from those of the first embodiment. The variable winning device 301 and its peripheral configuration according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. FIG. 21(a) is a front view of the variable winning device 301 and its peripheral configuration, (b) and (c) are sectional views of the variable winning device 301, and FIG. 22(a) is the variable winning device 301 and its peripheral configuration. is a perspective view of , and (b) is a plan view showing a rear face portion 305c of the opening/closing door 305. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the big winning opening 302 of the variable winning device 301 is formed as a horizontally long rectangular opening that opens forward. The size (width dimension) of the big winning opening 302 is larger than two game balls when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and is large enough for a plurality of game balls to pass through at the same time. As shown in FIG. 21(c), behind the big winning hole 302, a ball passage 303 is formed that guides the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 302 to the back side of the game board 24 and then guides it downward. ing. In the middle position of the ball passage 303, a winning sensor 302a for the big winning opening is arranged for detecting a game ball that has won the big winning opening 302. - 特許庁

The variable winning device 201 is provided with a plate-shaped opening/closing door 305 corresponding to the big winning opening 302 . The opening/closing door 305 can rotate in the front-rear direction about a rotating shaft provided at the lower end of the big prize opening 302 . By this forward and backward rotation, a protruding position (open position) that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 and opens the large winning slot 302, and a retracted position that prevents the front surface of the game board 24 from projecting and covers the large winning slot 302 ( closed position).

As shown in FIG. 21(b), when the opening/closing door 305 is positioned at the retracted position, the opening/closing door 305 covers the large winning opening 302 from the front, thereby restricting the entry of game balls into the large winning opening 302. , and a closed state in which the big winning opening 302 is closed is entered. At this time, the front surface portion 305b of the opening/closing door 305 is flush with the front surface of the game board 24 (the front surface portion 311a of the base body 311 of the variable prize winning device 301), or positioned closer to the back side of the game machine than the front surface of the game board 24. It has become. When the open/close door 305 rotates forward from this state and is displaced to the projecting position, a receiving area RA capable of receiving a game ball is formed in front of the big winning opening 302 . The receiving area RA has the same shape and size as the big winning opening 302 in a front view, and the winning of a game ball to the big winning opening 302 is allowed by forming the receiving area RA. As a result, an open state is created in which the big winning opening 302 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the height position of the opening/closing door 305 is set so that the opening/closing door 305 and the outlets 141 and 171 formed in the flow path forming portions 131 and 161 are arranged side by side. there is Specifically, when the opening/closing door 305 is positioned at the projecting position, at least one rear surface portion (ball receiving portion) 305c of the opening/closing door 305 is protruded from the second inclined portions 136, 166 of the flow path forming portions 131, 161. It is set so that the position is lowered by the size of the minute. In other words, between the rear surface portion 305c of the opening and closing door 305 and the second inclined portions 136, 166, the rear surface portion 305c of the opening and closing door 305 is lower than the second inclined portions 136, 166 by at least the diameter of the game ball. A portion is formed, and the out ports 141 and 171 are arranged in this stepped portion. Due to such a configuration, when the opening/closing door 305 is positioned at the projecting position, some of the game balls moving on the opening/closing door 305 enter the out ports 141 and 171 .

The out ports 141 and 171 are opened on the open/close door 305 side as in the first embodiment, and the size thereof is such that one game ball can pass through. In addition, the out ports 141, 171 and the front surfaces of the flow path forming portions 131, 161 in the vicinity thereof are made opaque, and the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is lower than that of the lower side out port 321, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 22(b), a projection 325 is provided on the rear surface portion 305c of the opening/closing door 305. As shown in FIG. The projecting portion 325 projects upward from the rear surface portion 305c, and is used to adjust the easiness of reaching the out ports 141 and 171 of the game balls moving on the opening/closing door 305. As shown in FIG. That is, the higher the protrusions 325 or the greater the number of protrusions 325, the more difficult it is for the game ball to reach the out ports 141, 171. It is possible to adjust the easiness of the game ball to escape to, that is, the winning rate of the game ball to the big winning hole 302. - 特許庁

In the present embodiment, since the projecting portion 325 is arranged near the front end portion 305f of the opening/closing door 305, even when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the game balls to the out ports 141 and 171 can be prevented from being laid down. It is possible to adjust the reachability of That is, by increasing the laying (degree of forward inclination) of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes easier for the game ball to pass through the front end portion 305f side of the opening/closing door 305, and the projecting portion 325 tends to affect the game ball. In this embodiment, the projections 325 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening/closing door 305, but they may be arranged on either the left or the right. Moreover, the number of protrusions 325 is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), the opening/closing door 305 extends in the left-right direction. It is positioned near the two vertical wall portions 138 and 168 . The distance between the left and right ends 305d, 305e of the opening/closing door 305 and each out port 141, 171 is less than the diameter of the game ball, and between the opening/closing door 305 positioned at the projecting position and each out port 141, 171. The game ball is prevented from falling from.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), a variable winning drive unit 219 for driving the opening/closing door 305 is attached to the rear side of the base body 311. As shown in FIG. The variable winning drive unit 219 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force from the solenoid to the opening/closing door 305 . The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81 . By driving the solenoid, the open/close door 305 rotates from the retracted position to the projecting position, and the variable winning device 301 switches from the closed state to the open state. When the output of the drive signal from the main control device 81 stops, the open/close door 305 returns from the protruding position to the retracted position due to the biasing force of the biasing means (such as a spring), and the variable winning device 301 switches from the open state to the closed state. .

As shown in FIG. 21( a ), a lower out port 321 is arranged below the variable winning device 301 . The lower out port 321 opens forward and has a horizontally long substantially elliptical shape when viewed from the front. The size (width dimension) of the lower out port 321 is larger than two game balls when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and is large enough to allow a plurality of game balls to pass through at the same time. Behind the lower out port 321, a ball passage 322 is formed to guide the game ball entering the lower out port 321 to the back side of the game board 24.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, the ball passage 322 corresponding to the lower outlet 321 and the ball passage 303 corresponding to the big winning opening 302 are merged, but these ball passages 322 and 303 do not merge. may be

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal game state and the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game flow in the normal game state, and FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game flow in the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in both the normal game state and the opening/closing execution mode, refer to FIG. Since it is the same as the case of the first embodiment described above, the description is omitted.

First, the flow of the game in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. 23(a). In the normal game state, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed, and the variable winning device 301 continues to be in the closed state. In such a state, when the game balls passing through the second inclined portions 136, 166 of the flow path forming portions 131, 161 and the regions PE4a to PE4c are led out to the variable winning device 301 side, those game balls will eventually Also passes in front of the opening/closing door 305 and flows down toward the lower outlet 321 . That is, all the game balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301 in the normal game state enter the lower out port 321 and are discharged from the game area PE.

Next, the game flow in the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 23(b). As already described, when the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the variable winning device 301 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the switching control from the open state to the closed state is performed at least once (in this embodiment, once). times) is executed, and in the open/close execution mode, such a round game is executed a plurality of times (15 times in this embodiment). In the open state of the variable winning device 301, the opening/closing door 305 is positioned at the protruding position, thereby forming a receiving area RA (see FIG. 21(c)) capable of receiving the game ball into the big winning opening 302, and opening the big winning opening. Winning of game balls to 302 is permitted. On the other hand, in the closed state, the opening/closing door 305 is positioned at the retracted position, so that the receiving area RA disappears, and winning of game balls into the big winning opening 302 is restricted.

In the game area PE, as in the case of the first embodiment, the game balls are arranged in the area where the receiving area RA is formed. Therefore, under the condition that the opening/closing door 305 is in the projecting position and the variable winning device 301 is in the open state, when the game balls reach the forming area of the receiving area RA, all the game balls flow into the receiving area RA. do. The game ball that has flowed into the receiving area RA in this way falls onto the rear surface portion 305c of the opening/closing door 305 and then advances backward on the rear surface portion 305c to enter the big winning opening 302.例文帳に追加Also, some of the game balls move in the left-right direction on the rear surface portion 305c of the opening/closing door 305. As shown in FIG. Then, when the projecting part 325 is overcome, the ball enters the out holes 141 and 171 and is discharged from the game area PE. As already explained, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 302, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out. No game balls are paid out.

On the other hand, when the game ball reaches the forming area of the receiving area RA under the condition that the opening/closing door 305 is in the retracted position and the variable winning device 301 is in the closed state, the game ball is opened and closed as in the normal game state. The ball passes in front of the door 305 and enters the lower out port 321. - 特許庁

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

All of the game balls that did not win other ball entry portions (upper working port 33, lower working port 34, general winning ports 31a to 31d) on the upstream side of the variable winning device 301 are formed in a predetermined area (receiving area RA Since the configuration is such that the signal is led out to the area where the signal is generated, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.

A lower out port 321 and out ports 141, 171 are provided, and a game ball enters the lower out port 321 when the variable winning device 301 is closed, and the variable winning device 301 is open. , the ball is entered into the out holes 141 and 171. As a result, the following effects are expected.

If the game ball wins the variable prize winning device 301 too efficiently, the player side is biased and advantageous, which may hinder the operation in the game hall. If such an inconvenience is expected at the design stage of the game machine, the flow path of the game balls may be reviewed and the winning rate to the variable winning device 301 may be adjusted. In this case, if the game ball is blatantly guided to the out side and the winning rate of the game ball to the variable winning device 301 is lowered, there is a possibility that the game motivation will be lowered, which is not desirable.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, the above problem is addressed by switching the outlet for discharging game balls according to the operation state of the variable winning device 301 . That is, when the variable winning device 301 is closed, the game ball enters the lower out port 321, so the game ball is discharged through the lower out port 321 when the open/close execution mode is not executed. In a game, the period during which the opening/closing execution mode is not performed is longer than the period during which the opening/closing execution mode is performed, and thus it tends to be dominant. This promotes awareness that the lower out port 321 is a discharge port for game balls, and the game balls that enter the lower out port 321 are out balls. In addition, when the variable winning device 301 is in the open state, the game balls are discharged through the out ports 141 and 171 other than the lower out port 321 . Due to the preconceived notion that the lower out port 321 is the out port, even if a game ball is entered into the out ports 141, 171, the player is prevented from recognizing this as discharge of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to discharge game balls that have not won a prize in the variable winning device 301 in the open state while making the discharge inconspicuous. As a result, it becomes possible to adjust the winning rate of the game ball to the variable winning device 301 while suppressing the decline in the desire to play.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, since the ball is entered into the out ports 141 and 171 via the opening/closing door 305 at the projecting position, the game balls are aggregated in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301. You can also keep the ball flowing. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the winning rate of the game balls to the variable winning device 301 while giving the impression that the game balls tend to approach the variable winning device 301.例文帳に追加

The visibility of the out ports 141 and 171 from the front view (front view from the front of the game machine) is lower than that of the lower out port 321. - 特許庁In this case, the presence of the out ports 141 and 171 is diluted compared to the lower side out port 321, and an increase in the player's attention to the out ports 141 and 171 is suppressed. As a result, the discharge of game balls through the out ports 141 and 171 can be made even less conspicuous.

In addition, in order to reduce the presence of the out ports 141 and 171 while emphasizing the lower out port 321, a display (e.g., "OUT") that suggests or clearly indicates that the out port is The above-mentioned display can be displayed on the lower out port 321 by providing it around the lower out port 321 such as on the side of the out port 321, or in the case where a decoration is arranged in front of the lower out port 321, on the decoration. On the other hand, the out ports 141 and 171 are not provided with such a display, or the above display is made less conspicuous than that of the lower out port 321 (for example, the display is made smaller). , thinned, etc.).

The out ports 141 and 171 are arranged upstream of the lower out port 321 . In gaming machines, the outlet is often arranged at the bottom (most downstream part) of the game area PE, and it is assumed that there are many cases in which players play with such a prejudice. This configuration utilizes this, and by arranging the out ports 141 and 171 upstream of the lower out port 321, the player can recognize the out ports 141 and 171 as the out ports at a glance. can be suppressed.

Out ports 141 and 171 are arranged adjacent to the opening/closing door 305 . To quickly enter a game ball into an out port 141, 171 when a game ball moving on a rear surface part 305c of the opening/closing door 305 passes through the opening/closing door 305 when the opening/closing door 305 is at a projecting position. can be done. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the flow of the game ball from passing through the opening/closing door 305 to the out ports 141, 171, and the entry of the game ball into the out ports 141, 171 becomes even less conspicuous. . In addition, the distance between the opening/closing door 305 and the big prize winning opening 302 can be shortened by arranging the out openings 141 and 171 and the opening/closing door 305 adjacent to each other. As a result, it is possible to let the ball enter the out holes 141 and 171 while making it look as if the game ball has won the big prize hole 302, thereby making the ejection more inconspicuous.

The distance between the out ports 141, 171 and the opening/closing door 305 is made less than the diameter of the game ball. For example, if the configuration is such that game balls fall from between the out ports 141, 171 and the opening/closing door 305, as a result of visually recognizing the state of the game balls falling from the opening/closing door 305, the player has an impression that the game balls are likely to fall. It may become easier to hold. In this respect, in this configuration, since the game balls are prevented from falling from between the out ports 141, 171 and the opening/closing door 305, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have the impression that the game balls are likely to spill out. It is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the desire to play.

In the above embodiment, the game ball cannot enter the lower outlet 321 in the open state. may be configured. Also, in the case of the closed state, the game ball basically does not enter the out ports 141, 171, but it may be possible to enter the ball in a range where it is difficult to enter compared to the case of the open state. good.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the variable winning device and its peripheral configuration are different from those of the above embodiments. The variable winning device 401 and its peripheral configuration according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. FIG. 24(a) is a front view of the variable winning device 401 and its peripheral configuration, (b) is a sectional view thereof, (a) of FIG. 25 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 401, (b) is an opening/closing member 431 and A plan view of its peripheral configuration, and FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 401 and its peripheral configuration. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted. 24(b) and 25(a), illustration of the left flow path forming portion 131 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the variable winning device 401 has a plate-like base body 411. By fitting the base body 411 into an opening formed at the bottom of the game board 24, It is attached to the game board 24 . As shown in FIG. 24(b), the distance between the front portion 411a of the base body 411 and the window panel 62 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, allowing the game ball to pass in front of the front portion 411a. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 24(a) and 24(b), the upper portion of the base body 411 is formed with a first prize winning opening 403 that opens toward the front of the gaming machine. The first prize winning opening 403 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. It is passable.

Behind the first winning opening 403, as shown in FIG. 25(a), after guiding the game ball that has entered the first winning opening 403 to the back side of the game board 24, there is a first ball guiding downward. A ball passage 405 is formed. In the middle position of the first ball passage 405, a winning sensor 403a for the first big winning opening for detecting a game ball that has won the first winning opening 403 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), below the first winning opening 403 and in front of the base body 411, a passage 408 through which game balls can pass is formed. The bottom portion of the passage portion 408 is partitioned by the inner rail portion 51, and out ports 441 and 442 are arranged on both left and right sides of the passage portion 408 (see FIGS. 24(a) and 26(a)). These out ports 441 and 442 are provided below the out ports 141 and 171 in the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, and are arranged sideways so as to face the passage portion 408 side. It is open.

A second winning opening 404 is formed in the center of the lower portion of the passage portion 408 so as to pass through the base body 411 in the thickness direction. The second prize winning opening 404 is formed as a substantially elliptical opening that opens forward and is oblong in front view, and its size (width dimension) is larger than two game balls when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. , a plurality of game balls can pass through at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 25( a ), a second ball passage 421 is provided on the back side of the base body 411 so as to communicate with the second winning opening 404 . The second ball passage 421 extends rearward, and the game ball that has won the second winning opening 404 flows into the second ball passage 421 and is guided rearward along the passage bottom surface 421a. In the middle of the second ball passage 421, a winning sensor 404a for the second big winning opening for detecting a game ball that has won the second winning opening 404 is arranged.

As described above, the variable winning device 401 of the present embodiment is provided with two winning openings 403 and 404 as winning openings into which game balls can win. It is configured. Incidentally, the first big winning opening winning sensor 403a and the second big winning opening winning sensor 404a are electrically connected to the main controller 81, and the detection areas of the respective big winning opening winning sensors 403a and 404a are Predetermined detection information (detection signal) is input to the main controller 81 when a game ball passes through. Based on this detection information, the main controller 81 determines whether or not there is a prize in the big prize opening 402 .

As shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the variable winning device 401 is provided with an opening/closing member 431 corresponding to the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 .

The opening/closing member 431 includes a first opening/closing plate 432 that opens and closes the first prize winning opening 403, and is rotatable in the front-rear direction about a rotating shaft provided at the lower end of the first winning opening 403. ing. By this forward and backward rotation, the first opening/closing plate 432 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 24 (the front surface portion 411a of the base body 411) (see FIGS. 25(a) and 26(b)), and the game position changes. It can be displaced to a retracted position (see FIGS. 24(b) and 26(a)) where projection from the front surface of the board 24 is suppressed.

When the first opening/closing plate 432 is positioned at the retracted position, the first opening/closing plate 432 covers the first winning opening portion 403 from the front, thereby restricting the entry of game balls into the first winning opening portion 403, A closed state is entered in which the first winning opening 403 is closed. At this time, the front surface portion 432b of the first opening/closing plate 432 is flush with the front surface of the game board 24 or is positioned closer to the back side of the game machine than the front surface of the game board 24 is. When the opening/closing member 431 rotates forward from this state and the first opening/closing plate 432 is positioned at the projecting position, the winning of game balls to the first winning opening 403 is permitted, and the first winning opening 403 is opened. Open state. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to configure the first winning port portion 403 so that game balls cannot enter the first winning port portion 403 when it is in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 26( a ), a second opening/closing plate 433 for opening/closing the second prize winning opening 404 is provided on the front surface portion 432 b of the first opening/closing plate 432 . The second opening/closing plate 433 is formed to project forward from the front surface portion 432b of the first opening/closing plate 432 when the first opening/closing plate 432 is at the retracted position. The depth dimension of the second opening/closing plate 433 (the amount of forward protrusion from the first opening/closing plate 432) is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball can be placed on the second opening/closing plate 433.

The second opening/closing plate 433 is integrated with the first opening/closing plate 432 and configured to rotate back and forth as the opening/closing member 431 rotates. By this forward and backward rotation, the second opening/closing plate 433 projects forward from the front surface of the game board 24 (the front surface portion 411a of the base body 411), and the upper surface portion 433b faces upward (FIGS. 24(b) and 26). (a)) and a retracted position (see FIGS. 25(a) and 26(b)) where the projection of the second opening/closing plate 433 is suppressed and the upper surface portion 433b is tilted forward (see FIGS. 25(a) and 26(b)). .

The second opening/closing plate 433 extends in the left-right direction, and more specifically, the left and right ends thereof are positioned near the second vertical wall portions 138 and 168 of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, respectively. Further, the depth dimension of the second opening/closing plate 433 (protruding length from the first opening/closing plate 432) is, as shown in FIG. The interval (distance) D1 is set to be less than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, when the second opening/closing plate 433 is positioned at the projecting position and the passage portion 408 is covered from above by the second opening/closing plate 433, the game ball can be thrown from either the front or the side of the second opening/closing plate 433. The inflow of game balls into the passage portion 408 is restricted because they cannot flow into the passage portion 408 . As a result, the winning of game balls into the second winning opening 404 is restricted, and the second winning opening 404 is closed. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to configure the second winning opening 404 so that the game ball cannot enter the closed state, and the configuration may be such that the winning is possible within a range where it is difficult to win compared to the open state.

Further, when the second opening/closing plate 433 is in the protruding position, the second opening/closing plate 433 protrudes forward of the game machine, so that the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433 can receive the game ball. It's becoming That is, the second opening/closing plate 433 functions not only as an opening/closing portion for opening/closing the second prize winning opening portion 404, but also as a ball receiving portion for receiving game balls. The game ball received on the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433 is moved from the upper surface portion 433b in the process of the second opening/closing plate 433 displacing from the projecting position to the retracted position, as shown in FIGS. It falls downward from 433b. As a result, the game ball flows into the passage portion 408 and can enter the second winning opening portion 404 . A plurality of ridges 215 (reducing means) are provided on the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433, and the staying period of the game ball on the second opening/closing plate 433 is extended.

As shown in FIG. 25(a), when the second opening/closing plate 433 is positioned at the retracted position, the first opening/closing plate 432 is positioned at the projecting position. The distance D2 between the upper end portion 432a of the opening/closing plate 432 and the window panel 62 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass in front of the first opening/closing plate 432. At this time, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the central portion 433c of the second opening/closing plate 433 protrudes further forward than the first opening/closing plate 432, narrowing the gap between the second opening/closing plate 433 and the window panel 62. is positioned behind the first opening/closing plate 432 . At these portions, the distance from the window panel 62 becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball passing in front of the first opening/closing plate 432 flows into the passage portion 408 through these portions.

In this way, when the second opening/closing plate 433 is switched from the projecting position to the retracted position, and during the period in which the second opening/closing plate 433 is maintained at the retracted position, the winning of game balls into the second winning opening portion 404 is permitted. , and the second winning opening 404 is opened. However, winning to the second winning opening 404 by falling from the second opening/closing plate 433 occurs only when the second opening/closing plate 433 is switched from the projecting position to the retracted position. , the winning to the second winning opening 404 occurs only when the game ball passes near the window panel 62 . Therefore, the winning probability of the game ball to the second winning opening portion 404 is lower than the winning probability to the first winning opening portion 403 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 24(a), the second opening/closing plate 433 has a mountain-like shape when viewed from the front, and is received by the upper surface portion 433b in the same manner as the shutter 216 according to the first embodiment. It is possible to guide game balls to out ports 141 and 171. - 特許庁The height position of the second opening/closing plate 433 with respect to the out ports 141 and 171, the distance between the out ports 141 and 171 and the second opening/closing plate 433, and the positional relationship between the two are described in the shutter according to the first embodiment. 216 and the out ports 141 and 171, the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), a variable winning drive unit 419 for driving the opening/closing member 431 is attached to the rear side of the base body 411. As shown in FIG. The variable winning drive unit 419 has a solenoid as a drive source and a link mechanism as drive force transmission means for transmitting the drive force from the solenoid to the opening/closing member 431 . The solenoid is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81 . By driving the solenoid, the first opening/closing plate 432 is moved to the retracted position and the second opening/closing plate 433 is moved to the retracted position from the state in which the first opening/closing plate 432 is moved to the retracted position and the second opening/closing plate 433 is moved to the projecting position. The opening/closing member 431 rotates to the state, and switches from the closed state in which the winning openings 403 and 404 (the big winning opening 402) are closed to the open state in which they are opened. When the output of the drive signal from the main controller 81 is stopped, the opening/closing member is moved to the state in which the first opening/closing plate 432 is at the retracted position and the second opening/closing plate 433 is at the projecting position by the biasing force of the biasing means (such as a spring). 431 returns and switches from the open state to the closed state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since some of the game balls that have flowed into the passage portion 408 can be discharged through the out ports 441 and 442, the through hole provided in the lower center of the passage portion 408 serves as the second winning opening portion 404. However, as shown in FIG. 27, the out-ports 441 and 442 may be omitted, and the second prize-winning portion 404 may be configured to open upward. In addition, in FIG. 27, the illustration of the second opening/closing plate 433 is omitted in order to make the second prize winning opening 404 easier to understand.

Next, distribution of jackpot types according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the allocation table. The distribution table is a table for distributing the types of jackpot results based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and is stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113 (see FIG. 8).

As shown in FIG. 28, in the distribution table in the present embodiment, as the types of jackpot results, explicit 15R probability variable jackpot results (explicit high probability game results) and non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot results (non-explicit high probability A corresponding game result or a result of a latent probability change state) and a 15R normal jackpot result are set.

The explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery results in the win/fail lottery result in a big winning state and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. The non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The 15R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, but the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as in the case of the 15R normal jackpot result. Then, as a game state, it is possible to create a game state in which the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, although the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is commonly the low frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible for the player to make it impossible or difficult to distinguish between the unspecified 15R probability variable jackpot result and the 15R normal jackpot result, and it is interesting to predict whether the success/fail lottery mode is a high-probability mode or a low-probability mode. can be given.

In the distribution table shown in FIG. 28, among the values of "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" corresponds to the explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result, and "10 to 19" is the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot. Corresponding to the result, "20 to 29" corresponds to the 15R normal jackpot result, but the distribution of these numbers is arbitrary.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described in this embodiment.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. This process is executed in step S305 of the game round control process (FIG. 14).

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S701, a success/failure judgment process for judging whether or not the reservation information referred to in the fluctuation start process of this time corresponds to the winning of the jackpot is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information obtained from the information for judging the jackpot, ie, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1, is grasped. Then, when the success/failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the success/failure table for the low-probability mode stored in the success/failure table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the grasped information corresponds to the jackpot winning. If the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/fail table for the high probability mode stored in the win/fail table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 is referred to, and the grasped information is determined as the big win. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S701 corresponds to the winning of the jackpot. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, a type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, information for type determination, that is, information obtained from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, referring to the distribution table (FIG. 28) stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the ROM 113, it is specified whether or not the grasped information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result. .

In the following step S704, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the probability variation jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination processing in step S703. In the case of the probability variable jackpot result, stop result setting processing for the probability variable jackpot is executed in step S705, and in the case of not the probability variable jackpot result, the stop result setting processing for the normal jackpot is executed in step S706. If it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot has not been won, then in step S707 stop result setting processing for the time of loss is executed.

In each of the stop result setting processes of steps S705 to S707, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 113 is referred to for information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43. The specified information is stored in RAM 114 . In addition, in steps S705 and S706, information for specifying that the result of the winning/failure determination of the game round this time is a jackpot result in the MPU 112 (explicit 15R probability variable jackpot flag, non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot flag, 15R normal jackpot flag) is stored in the various flag storage area 114 e of the RAM 114 .

After executing any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, in step S708, a variable display time setting process for performing variable display is executed. In the subsequent step S709, a variation command and a type command are set. The variation command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the variation display time. Also, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result information, non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result information, 15R normal jackpot result information, and off result information.

The variation command and type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The effect control device 82 transmits the variation command and the type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 grasps the variation display pattern of the symbol display device 41 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls the symbol display device so that the variation display pattern thus grasped is executed. 41 is displayed and controlled. After that, in step S710, after the main display section 43 starts the variable display of the pattern, the variable start processing is terminated.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process according to the present embodiment. Here, the processes of steps S801 and S802 shown in FIG. 30 are executed between steps S509 and S510 in the big winning opening opening/closing process of FIG. It should be noted that step S509 determines whether or not the game ball has won the variable winning device 401 based on the detection state of the winning sensors 403a and 404a for the big winning opening, and step S510 determines the value of the winning counter PC. This is the process of updating.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S509, that is, when the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 401 is detected, in step S801, the game ball is detected by the winning sensor 404a for the second large winning opening. It is determined whether or not the As a result of the determination, if the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole winning sensor 404a, then in step S802, the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole winning sensor 404b. , sets a second prize winning port command indicating that the game ball has won the second prize winning port 404 . The second winning mouth command set in step S802 is output to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13).

After execution of step S802 or when a negative determination is made in step S801, the process proceeds to step S510, and the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by one.

In this way, in the present embodiment, when the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 401 (large winning opening 402) is detected, it is determined whether it is the winning to the second winning opening 404. I have to. However, the winning counter PC is updated in units of winnings to the big winning opening 402 , without distinguishing between the first winning opening section 403 and the second winning opening section 404 . Therefore, when the total number of winnings to the winning openings 403 and 404 reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 10, see step S506 in FIG. 16), the variable winning device 401 It is switched from an open state to a closed state.

<Announcement effect control processing>
Next, the notification effect control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing notification effect control processing.

The notification effect control process is a process for performing a notification effect during execution of the opening/closing execution mode, and is activated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec). In the notification effect control process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition for executing the notification effect is established, and when it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the pattern display device 41 is controlled so that the notification effect is executed.

Specifically, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. This determination is made based on whether or not the opening command from the main controller 81 has been received. If it is determined that it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it terminates the notification effect control processing, while if it is determined that it is in the opening/closing execution mode, in step S902, the current jackpot result is the non-explicit probability variable jackpot result or the normal jackpot. Determine whether it is a result. This determination is made based on the type command from the main controller 81 .

As a result of the determination, if the result of the current jackpot is neither the non-explicit probability variable jackpot result nor the normal jackpot result, that is, if it is the explicit probability variable jackpot result, the notification effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot result is either the non-explicit probability variable jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S903, and it is determined whether or not it is during the opening period. When it is determined that it is during the opening period, an introductory effect setting process is executed in step S904.

Here, the introductory effect will be described with reference to FIG. 32(a). The introduction effect is a game effect executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, and determines whether the game state (lottery mode) after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. It is executed as a preliminary effect of the notification effect to be specified. In the introductory effect, an egg image 461 with "?" displayed and a warrior character image 462 holding a sword are displayed. Although illustration is omitted, a character display such as "It may be good if 20 or more game balls are allowed to win in the second winning opening 404..." is also displayed.

In addition, in the introductory effect, a big win pattern image 463 showing the main symbols stopped and displayed on the activated lines L1 to L5 in the game round resulting in the big win is displayed. In the present embodiment, in the case of a non-explicit probability variable jackpot result, the same even-numbered symbols are stop-displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5, as in the case of the normal jackpot result. For this reason, the player cannot distinguish whether the result of the variable probability big win or the normal big win is the result of stopping on the activated lines L1 to L5.

Furthermore, in the introductory effect, a count image 464 indicating the number of winnings to the second winning opening 404 is displayed. In the present embodiment, when a prize is detected in the second prize-winning portion 404, a display is made in which the warrior character image 462 swings down the sword toward the egg image 461, and the numerical value displayed in the count image 464 is displayed. counted up. These displays serve as notifications corresponding to the fact that a prize has been won in the second prize winning port portion 404 .

Returning to the explanation of the notification effect control process in FIG. Set the output command to H.212. The display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 based on the command.

After execution of step S904 or when a negative determination is made in step S903, it is determined in step S905 whether or not an announcement effect or an end effect, which will be described later, has been executed. If these effects have been executed, the notification effect control process is terminated. If not, it is checked in step S906 whether or not the second winning opening command from the main controller 81 has been received. judge. The second winning opening command is output when the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 is detected in the main controller 81, and the second winning opening command is received. In step S907, the value of the second winning counter SPC is incremented by 1 and updated. The second winning counter SPC is for managing the winning number of game balls to the second winning opening 404 in the effect control device 82 and is stored in the RAM 244 . Also, in step S907, an output command to the display control device 212 is set so as to update the display of the count image 464 described above.

After execution of step S907 or when a negative determination is made in step S906 (when no new second prize winning mouth command has been received), the process proceeds to step S908, and the value of the second prize winning counter SPC is a predetermined number (for example, 20). It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied. When it is determined that the value of the second winning counter SPC is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, notification effect setting processing is executed in step S909.

Here, the notification effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c). The notification effect is a game effect for notifying (explicitly) whether or not the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished is the high probability mode. If the jackpot result is a non-explicit probability variable jackpot result, that is, if the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. An image 465 in which characters "Variable" appear is displayed, and a warrior character image 462 showing a happy appearance is displayed. On the other hand, when the jackpot result is the normal jackpot result, that is, when the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. An image 466 in which characters "Normal" appear is displayed, and a warrior character image 462 standing still is displayed. By looking at these displays, the player can clearly know whether the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode.

Returning to the description of the notification effect control process of FIG. 31, in step S909 (notification effect setting process), the notification effect of FIG. 32(b) or FIG. Set an output command to the display controller 212 as is done on the screen G.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if the value of the second winning counter SPC is less than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S910, and the current round game is a predetermined round number (for example, 10R) round game. Determine whether or not there is When it is determined that it is not the predetermined number of rounds, this notification effect control processing is ended, while when it is determined that it is the predetermined number of rounds, end effect setting processing is executed in step S911.

In the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 32(d), an unbroken egg image 461 is displayed, and a downcast warrior character image 462 is displayed. In this case, the egg image 461 is marked with "?" so that the player cannot distinguish whether the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode. do. In this case, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the player proceeds with the game while uncertain whether or not the high-probability mode is set. At step S911 in FIG. 31, an output command to the display control device 212 is set so that the above-mentioned ending effect is performed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of winning game balls into the second winning opening 404 does not reach a predetermined number by the time the round game of the predetermined number of rounds is completed, the game ends as a time-out. It is configured to display a rendition. Therefore, the player strongly desires that the winning to the second winning opening portion 404 is promptly achieved, and the feeling of impatience and tension is suitably aroused. This makes it possible to liven up the game as compared with the case where the open/close execution mode is only vaguely digested.

After execution of step S909 or step S911, the value of the second winning counter SPC is cleared by inputting "0" in step S912. After that, the notification effect control process is terminated.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal game state and the opening/closing execution mode will be described. In addition, in both the normal game state and the opening/closing execution mode, refer to FIG. Since it is the same as the case of the first embodiment described above, the description is omitted.

First, the game flow in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIG. 26(a). In the normal game state, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed, and the variable winning device 401 continues to be in the closed state. The closed state in this case means that the rotational position of the opening/closing member 431 is such that the first opening/closing plate 432 closes the first winning opening portion 403 and the second opening/closing plate 433 closes the second winning opening portion 404. set state. In this state, as already explained, the second opening/closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion, and it becomes possible to receive a game ball flowing down the game area PE. The game ball received by the second opening/closing plate 433 is guided toward the out ports 141 and 171 by the second opening/closing plate 433 and enters the out ports 141 and 171 . That is, the game balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 in the normal game state enter either the left or right out-hole 141 or 171 and are discharged from the game area PE.

Next, the game flow in the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 33, “arrival ball” means a game ball that has reached the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 .

When the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning device 401 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and thereafter, a round game is executed in which switching control to switch to the closed state is performed at least once (once in this embodiment). Also, in the opening/closing execution mode, such a round game is performed a plurality of times (15 times in the present embodiment).

In the open state of the variable prize winning device 401, the opening and closing member 431 rotates forward (see FIG. 26(b)), so that the first prize winning port 403 and the second prize winning port 404 are opened. Winning of game balls to winning openings 403 and 404 is permitted. Therefore, the game ball that reaches the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 at the timing when the variable winning device 401 is in the open state wins either the first winning port 403 or the second winning port 404 (Fig. 33 timing t1 to t4). In this case, the winning probability of the game ball to the second winning opening portion 404 is lower than the winning probability to the first winning opening portion 403 as described above.

When the variable prize winning device 401 is in the closed state, both the first prize winning port 403 and the second prize winning port 404 are closed, while the second opening/closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion. That is, the game ball that reaches the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 at the timing of the waiting period (the period of waiting for the start of the next round game with the variable winning device 401 closed) set between the round games before and after , drops onto the upper surface portion 433 b of the second opening/closing plate 433 . Then, before the game ball reaches the out ports 141, 171, that is, when the next round game is started under the condition that it exists on the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433 (the variable winning device 401 When it is switched to the open state), the game ball falls downward and wins the second prize winning opening 404 (timings t5 and t6 in FIG. 33).

In addition, when the game ball on the second opening/closing plate 433 reaches the out ports 141 and 171 before the next round game is started, the game ball does not enter the second winning port 404 and is out. It is discharged from the game area PE through the mouths 141 and 171 . In this respect, in the present embodiment, the second opening/closing plate 433 is provided with the ridge portion 215 as a deceleration means, and the stay period of the game ball on the second opening/closing plate 433 is lengthened. That is, preferential treatment is given so that the game ball that reaches the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 during the standby period is more likely to win the second winning opening portion 404 .

In the above description, the standby period between rounds has been described, but the arrangement of the variable prize winning device 401 during the closing period before the execution of the first round (the period in which the variable prize winning device 401 is in the closed state immediately before the start of the first round) The same applies to game balls that have reached the area. That is, when the game ball is on the second opening/closing plate 433 and the first round game is started, the game ball wins the second winning opening portion 404 .

Thus, in this embodiment, not only when the variable winning device 401 is in the open state, but also when the game ball reaches the arrangement area of the variable winning device 401 when it is in the closed state, the variable winning device 401 wins. becomes possible. Then, when the number of winnings to the second winning opening portion 404 reaches 20 or more by the time the tenth round of the round game ends, an announcement effect (FIG. 32) is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41. A notification corresponding to the lottery mode (game state) after the execution of the opening/closing execution mode is performed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A second opening/closing plate 433 is provided on the opening/closing member 431, and the second opening/closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion when the variable winning device 401 is in the closed state. A game ball received by the second opening/closing plate 433 is configured to be able to win a prize in a second prize winning port portion 404.例文帳に追加

When the open/close execution mode is executed, it is desirable for the player to achieve efficient winning of the large winning opening and to suppress useless consumption of game balls. Therefore, depending on the player, there are cases where a so-called stopping shot is performed, such as refraining from shooting the game ball at a timing when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole. However, if such technical intervention is performed excessively, the fairness of the game is impaired, which is not desirable.

In this respect, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the game ball is launched at a timing when the winning of the first winning opening portion 403 is unlikely to occur, the second opening/closing plate 433 (ball receiving portion) It is possible to win a prize at the second prize opening portion 404 . As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently obtain benefits while suppressing the occurrence of wasted balls, and the configuration can be made to meet the needs of the player. Not only that, it is also possible to suppress rampant stopping shots, which is advantageous in ensuring fairness of the game.

Moreover, the game ball received by the second opening/closing plate 433 can win the second winning opening 404 instead of the first winning opening 403 . For example, if the game ball falling from the second opening/closing plate 433 is configured to win the first prize winning opening 403, the winning destination is the same as the game ball winning when the first winning opening 403 is opened. In the machine 10, it may become difficult to identify which route the game ball has won. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the winning destination of the game ball differs between when winning by falling from the second opening/closing plate 433 and when winning without falling. It becomes possible to easily identify whether the player has won a prize in the route. Therefore, the former case can be easily made more advantageous than the latter case, and the configuration can be advantageous in arousing a special feeling of winning through falling from the second opening/closing plate 433 .

Further, for example, in the configuration in which the game ball received by the second opening/closing plate 433 (ball receiving portion) is awarded to the first winning opening portion 403, the game ball heading to the first winning opening portion 403 through the ball receiving portion and the ball receiving portion There is a concern that the game ball that goes directly to the first winning opening 403 without going through will interfere, and that each winning will be hindered. In this regard, in this configuration, the winning opening through which the ball receiving section is intervened and the winning opening through which the ball receiving section is not intervened are separated, so that the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

The game ball received by the second opening/closing plate 433 is dropped downward to win a prize in the second prize winning port portion 404.例文帳に追加In this case, the game ball on the second opening/closing plate 433 can be guided to the second winning opening portion 404 by utilizing the forward rotation of the opening/closing member 431, and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, by switching from the closed state to the open state, the game ball received by the second opening/closing plate 433 is awarded to the second winning opening portion 404, and the ball receiving state of the second opening/closing plate 433 is reset. can be done. As a result, when the variable prize winning device 401 is returned from the open state to the closed state, it becomes possible to start receiving a new ball in a state in which no game balls remain on the second opening/closing plate 433 .

Further, the second prize winning opening portion 404 is arranged below the second opening/closing plate 433 and is configured to open upward. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball dropped from the second opening/closing plate 433 to win the second winning opening portion 404 . Moreover, the path of the game ball from the second opening/closing plate 433 to the second winning opening 404 can be simplified, and the area occupied by the path in the game area PE can be kept smaller than when the path is complicated. becomes possible. That is, it is possible to provide an optimum configuration for a gaming machine with a limited game area PE.

When the opening/closing member 431 rotates forward to open the variable winning device 401, the distance D2 between the first opening/closing plate 432 and the window panel 62 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, the game ball passes in front of the first opening/closing plate 432 and can win the second winning opening 404 . That is, it is possible to expect double winning to the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404, and it is more interesting than a uniform game that only determines whether a game ball enters one winning opening. can be improved.

A game ball received by the second opening/closing plate 433 is led out to the out ports 141 and 171.例文帳に追加In this case, when the opening/closing execution mode is not executed and the variable winning device 401 continues to be in the closed state, the game ball received by the second opening/closing plate 433 is guided to the out ports 141 and 171 and appropriately discharged from the game area PE. can do. As a result, game balls are prevented from staying on the second opening/closing plate 433, and ball clogging in the second opening/closing plate 433 and its peripheral area is suppressed.

Further, the configuration is such that the out ports 141 and 171 are arranged adjacent to the sides of the opening/closing member 431 . In this case, the lead-out of game balls from the second opening/closing plate 433 to the out ports 141 and 171 can be facilitated. In addition, since the distance between the second opening/closing plate 433 and the out ports 141 and 171 becomes closer, it is possible to check whether the game ball remains on the second opening/closing plate 433 or has entered the out ports 141 and 171. , visual confirmation can be performed without moving the line of sight, and attention points can be consolidated. As a result, compared to the case where visual recognition of various locations is required, distraction of attention is suppressed, and the player can easily concentrate on the game.

In addition, the out ports 141 and 171 are configured to open toward the opening/closing member 431 side. In this case, the momentum of the game ball moving on the second opening/closing plate 433 can be used to smoothly enter the out ports 141 and 171, and the flow of the game ball stagnates on the second opening/closing plate 433. can be suppressed. In addition, since the game ball can enter the out ports 141 and 171 as it is without changing the movement direction, the structure for leading out the game ball to the out ports 141 and 171 can be simplified.

When a predetermined number of winnings to the second winning opening part 404 are detected, the first winning opening part 403 is configured to execute a notification performance for notifying whether the result is a probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The configuration is such that winning a prize in the second prize winning opening 404 is more advantageous for the player than winning a prize. In this case, not only is the game ball received by the second opening/closing plate 433 to suppress the generation of useless balls, but depending on which of the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 the game ball wins, The development of the game can be made different (whether to proceed with the game knowing whether it is in the high-probability mode or whether to proceed with the game uncertain). That is, which of the winning openings 403 and 404 wins becomes a matter of great interest to the player, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In other words, the relationship between the first opening/closing plate 432 and the second opening/closing plate 433 in the present embodiment is such that the opening/closing member 431 is in the closed state at the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433. In some cases, it can be said that it stands up or protrudes upward and extends in the passage direction of the upper surface portion 433b (the direction toward the out ports 141 and 171). In this case, as the opening/closing member 431 rotates, the game balls on the upper surface portion 433b are dropped and flow downwards under the opening/closing member 431, while the first opening/closing plate 432 moves a new game ball onto the opening/closing member 431. Inflow can be suppressed. As a result, the opportunity for the game ball to flow down below the opening/closing member 431 can be restricted, and the pleasure when the game ball falls can be increased.

In addition, the first opening/closing plate 432 is disposed apart from the tip of rotation of the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433 by at least the diameter of the game ball. located at the opposite end. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 431 is in the closed position (FIG. 24(b)), the game ball can be placed in front of the first opening/closing plate 432 on the upper surface portion 433b, and when the opening/closing member 431 rotates forward ( 25A), it is possible to prevent the first opening/closing plate 432 from hindering the game ball from falling from the upper surface portion 433b. That is, the function of dropping the game ball received by the upper surface portion 433b and the function of preventing the game ball from dropping further can be satisfactorily compatible.

Furthermore, the first opening/closing plate 432 extends over the entire length of the upper surface portion 433b in the passage direction. In this case, when the opening/closing member 431 is positioned at the open position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the side of the first opening/closing plate 432 and flowing into the passage portion 408 .

When the opening/closing member 431 is at the open position, the game ball is placed on the first opening/closing plate 432, and when the opening/closing member 431 returns to the closed position in that state, the first opening/closing plate remains on the game ball. 432 may rotate backwards. In this case, the game ball may be caught between the first opening/closing plate 432 and an object behind the first opening/closing plate 432, resulting in ball biting. In this regard, in the above configuration, a space portion (first winning port portion 403 and first ball passage 405) capable of accommodating one or more game balls is provided behind the first opening/closing plate 432. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of

<Modification 1 of the third embodiment>
In this modified example, the configuration of the opening/closing member 431 is different from that in the third embodiment. is narrower than in the embodiment of FIG. This modification will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a sectional view of the variable winning device 401 in the open state. In this figure, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the third embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, when the opening/closing member 431 is rotated forward from the closed position (FIG. 24(b)) and displaced to the open position, the distance D2 between the upper end portion 432a of the first opening/closing plate 432 and the window panel 62 is The depth dimension of the first opening/closing plate 432 is set so as to be less than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot pass in front of the first opening/closing plate 432 (opening/closing member 431) and does not flow into the passage portion 408 below the opening/closing member 431.

As described above, in this modification, even if the opening/closing member 431 is rotated forward to the rotational position for opening the first winning opening 403, the second winning opening 404 is not opened and the first winning opening 403 is opened. It is configured such that only is opened. In this case, the opportunity to win a prize to the second prize winning port 404 can be limited only when switching from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball is dropped from the second opening/closing plate 433 to the second prize winning port 404. It is possible to make the game to be awarded a prize stand out.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the operating mode of the opening/closing member 431 is different from that of the third embodiment. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 401 in the closed state, FIG. 36(a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 401 in the open state A, FIG. 37 is a plan view thereof, and FIG. is a sectional view of the variable winning device 401 of . In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the third embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The variable winning device 401 of this embodiment includes two open states as the open state. Specifically, there is an open state A (FIG. 36) in which the second winning opening 404 is open, and an open state B (FIG. 37) in which the first winning opening 403 is open. These open states A and B are realized by adjusting the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the opening/closing member 431 in the variable winning device 401 . As a state other than the open states A and B, a closed state (FIG. 35) in which both the first prize winning port 403 and the second prize winning port 404 are closed can be taken. Since it is the same as the closed state (FIG. 24(b)) according to the embodiment, the description is omitted. In the closed state shown in FIG. 35, the distance D1 between the front end portion 433a of the second opening/closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 is less than the diameter of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b), in the open state A, the amount of rotation of the opening/closing member 431 toward the front of the gaming machine from the closed state is set as the first amount of rotation. While allowing the winning of game balls to the first winning opening portion 403, the winning of game balls to the first winning opening portion 403 is not allowed. That is, the first rotation amount is set so that the degree of opening of the first winning opening portion 403 is suppressed within a range in which a game ball cannot enter the first winning opening portion 403, and the upper end portion 432a of the first opening/closing plate 432 and the window panel are rotated. 62 and the distance D4 between the left and right ends 433d and 433e of the second opening/closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 are larger than the diameter of the game ball. When the distances D3 and D4 are equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, first, the game ball flowing down from above the opening/closing member 431 passes in front of the first opening/closing plate 432 and reaches the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433. It will be loaded. The game ball placed on the upper surface portion 433b moves toward the left end portion 433d or the right end portion 433e along the inclination of the upper surface portion 433b, and falls below the opening/closing member 431 through the front regions of the ends 433d and 433e. do. In this way, a ball passage 471 through which a game ball can pass is formed, and a game ball can enter the second winning opening 404 .

Also, if the game ball is placed on the second opening/closing plate 433 immediately before switching from the closed state to the open state A, the game ball falls downward from the second opening/closing plate 433 in the process of switching to the open state A. Then, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second prize opening portion 404 .

As shown in FIG. 37(a), in the open state B, the amount of rotation of the opening/closing member 431 toward the front of the game machine from the closed state is set to a second amount of rotation larger than the first amount of rotation. While allowing the winning to the winning opening portion 403, it does not allow the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening portion 404.例文帳に追加That is, the second rotation amount is such that the first opening/closing plate 432 opens the first winning opening portion 403 to the extent that the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening portion 403 is allowed, The opening/closing member 431 is rotated so that the passage portion 408 (see FIG. 24(b)) connected to the first opening/closing plate 432 is covered from above. In the present embodiment, when the opening/closing member 431 rotates to the rotation position where the first opening/closing plate 432 is in the open state B, the distance D5 between the upper end portion 432a of the first opening/closing plate 432 and the window panel 62 is the game. Its dimensions are set to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

Here, since the second amount of rotation makes the forward amount of rotation of the opening/closing member 431 from the closed state larger than the first amount of rotation, switching from the closed state to the open state B is performed via the open state A. It is supposed to be done by At this time, the period of the open state A is configured to be shorter than the period of the open state B (the period during which the open state B is maintained).

Also, as shown in FIG. 37(b), when the game ball is placed on the second opening/closing plate 433 immediately before switching from the closed state to the open state B, the game ball falls downward, and it becomes possible to win a prize in the second prize winning opening 404.例文帳に追加That is, under the condition that the variable prize winning device 401 is in the open state B, winning to the second prize winning port 404 is not permitted, but when switching to the open state B, prize winning to the second prize winning port 404 is permitted.

In this embodiment, the variable winning drive unit 419 has a stepping motor as a drive source. The stepping motor is electrically connected to the main controller 81 and driven based on a drive signal from the main controller 81 . Specifically, when the main controller 81 outputs the first drive signal, the opening/closing member 431 is rotated so that the variable winning device 401 is in the open state A, and the main controller 81 outputs the second drive signal. is output, the opening/closing member 431 is rotated so that the variable winning device 401 is in the open state B. Further, when a return signal is output from the main control device 81, the opening/closing member 431 is rotated so that the variable winning device 401 is closed.

Next, distribution of jackpot types according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38(a). FIG. 38(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table.

In the distribution table of the present embodiment, two types of non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result A and non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result B are set as those corresponding to the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result. In addition, two types of normal jackpot result A and normal jackpot result B are set as those corresponding to the 15R normal jackpot result.

The symbols stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are different between when the jackpot type is the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result A and when the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result B is obtained. The same symbol combination may be stopped and displayed on the device 41 (for example, the symbol combination of "444" is both the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result A and the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result B can be displayed). This makes it impossible or difficult to identify which jackpot result is the combination of symbols stop-displayed on the pattern display device 41, and prevents the player from easily grasping the jackpot type. The same applies to the normal jackpot results A and B, and although the symbols stop-displayed on the main display unit 43 are different, the same symbol combination may be stop-displayed on the pattern display device 41. It's becoming

The explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result is the same as the distribution table (FIG. 28) of the third embodiment.

Next, the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of the variable winning device 401 will be described with reference to FIG. 38(b). FIG. 38(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between them.

When the jackpot type is the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result A or the 15R normal jackpot result A, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result. In the open state A, the second winning opening portion 404 is opened. This is detected by the winning sensor 404a for the second prize winning opening. Then, during execution of the opening/closing execution mode, when winning of a predetermined number or more of game balls into the second winning opening portion 404 is detected, notification effects shown in FIGS. 32(b) and (c) are executed. , the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is terminated. Thereby, the player can clearly know whether the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result B or the 15R normal jackpot result B, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state B in the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result. Although it is possible to expect a prize to be won in the second prize winning port 404 at the time of switching from the closed state to the open state B, the second prize winning port 404 is not allowed to win after the transition to the open state B, so the state is opened. As compared with the state A, winning to the second winning opening 404 is less likely to occur. Therefore, when the jackpot type is the unspecified 15R probability variable jackpot result B or the 15R normal jackpot result B, the end effect shown in FIG. The possibility that the player will proceed to the game after the opening/closing execution mode ends without clearly grasping whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is completed increases.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the open state A is more advantageous than the open state B because the probability of knowing the lottery mode after the end of the open/close execution mode increases. For this reason, the player is given the amusement of playing the game in anticipation that the variable winning device 401 will be opened in the open state A, and the degree of attention to the game is preferably increased.

In addition, the open state shown in FIG.38(b) may target all the round games performed in opening-and-closing execution mode, and may target a part of round games. For example, when the jackpot type is the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result B or the 15R normal jackpot result B, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state B in all round games in the open/close execution mode, and the non-explicit 15R probability variable When the jackpot result A or the 15R normal jackpot result A is obtained, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A in round games from the 1st round to the 10th round, and in the open state B in the remaining round games. It can be set as the aspect to do.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The open state has a plurality of states, a closed state in which both the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 are closed, an open state A in which the second winning opening portion 404 is opened, and a first opening state. It is configured to be switchable to an open state B in which the winning opening portion 403 is in an open state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the winning modes of the game balls and improve the amusement, compared with a uniform game in which only whether or not the game balls enter one winning hole. Moreover, since such switching is realized by one opening/closing member 431, when the opening/closing member 431 operates, the winning opening portion to be switched to the open state is not unambiguously determined. It is possible to provide the fun of predicting whether the game will be in an open state. In addition, since it is more advantageous for the player for the game ball to enter the second prize winning port 404 than to enter the game ball to the first prize winning port 403, either the open state A or B is established. This is of great interest to players. As a result, it is expected that the player will take a stronger interest in the behavior of the opening/closing member 431, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

When the variable winning device 401 is switched from the closed state to the open state B, the open state A is passed through. In this case, the behavior of the opening/closing member 431 halfway through switching to the open state B can be matched with the behavior of the opening/closing member 431 when switching from the closed state to the open state A. FIG. At this time, in the period in which the behavior of the opening/closing member 431 matches, the player cannot determine which of the open states A and B will be. This avoids the situation in which the prize winning openings 403 and 404 to be in the open state are found early from the behavior of the opening/closing member 431, and enhances the fun of predicting which of the prize winning openings 403 and 404 will be in the open state. be able to.

When switching to the open state B via the open state A, the period of the open state A is shorter than the period of the open state B.例文帳に追加For example, if the period of the open state A is longer than the period of the open state B, the winning of game balls to the second winning opening 404 is more likely to occur. As a result, the difference from the open state B becomes ambiguous, and the significance of providing the open state B may be lost. In this regard, according to this configuration, the winning probability of the game ball to the second winning opening portion 404 can be kept low even though it is configured to pass through the open state A, and appropriate differentiation from the open state B can be achieved. be possible.

<Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment>
This modification differs from the fourth embodiment in that the open state of the variable winning device 401 is changed during one round game. This modification will be described below with reference to FIG. 39(a). FIG. 39(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 401 during one round game.

In this modification, when one round game is started, first, the variable winning device 401 is switched from the closed state to the open state A (see FIG. 36) in which the second winning opening 404 is opened. Then, in the course of the one round game, the variable winning device 401 is switched from the open state A to the open state B (see FIG. 37) in which the first winning opening 403 is opened. After that, based on the establishment of the end condition of the round game (the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches a predetermined upper limit number or the opening period reaches a predetermined upper limit period), the variable winning device 401 is switched from the open state B to the closed state, and the round game ends.

Since the open state of the variable prize winning device 401 changes in the middle of the round game in this way, it is expected that the player will carefully observe the behavior of the opening/closing member 431, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game. . In addition, it is possible to diversify the flow of game balls and the manner of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 401 compared to the conventional game machine that only determines whether the variable prize winning device 401 is opened or not, thereby improving the amusement. become.

Switching from the open state A to the open state B in the above case is arbitrary as long as the maintenance period of the open state A (the period in which the second winning opening 404 is kept open) is ensured to some extent. For example, the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches a predetermined number less than the upper limit number, or the execution period of the open state A (the period in which the second winning opening 404 is in the open state ) has reached a predetermined period shorter than the upper limit period, or based on the fact that both of them hold.

Further, when switching from the open state A to the open state B, the variable winning device 401 is shifted from the open state A to the open state B without returning to the closed state. In this case, compared to the case where the variable winning device 401 is returned to the closed state and then shifted to the open state B, the amount of rotation of the opening/closing member 431 until reaching the open state B can be reduced, and quick state switching is possible. become. In addition, by not intervening the closed state, the generation of useless balls (occurrence of events in which game balls enter the out ports 141 and 171) is suppressed, and the variable winning device 401 can efficiently win the game balls. become.

In addition, it is not necessary to change the open state in all round games in the open/close execution mode. For example, as shown in FIG. That is, the change in the open state may be performed in at least a part of the round game in the open/close execution mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39(c), when the open state of the variable prize winning device 401 is changed in a plurality of round games, the change pattern of the open state may be changed. In this case, the manner in which the open state changes varies depending on the round, which is effective in diversifying the winning modes of the game balls to the variable winning device 401 .

<Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment>
This modification differs from the fourth embodiment and its modification 1 in that the open state of the variable winning device 401 is changed for each round. This modification will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between each round and the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning device 401. FIG.

When the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A in the first round game, and is opened in the open state B in the second round game unlike the first round. be. In addition, the variable winning device 401 is opened in the open state A in the third round game, and is opened in the open state A in the fourth round game as in the case of the third round.

Since the open state of the variable winning device 401 differs depending on the round, the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device 401 differs depending on the round. As a result, it is possible to diversify the ways of enjoying the round game and improve the interest compared to the case where the same round game is repeated as the opening/closing execution mode progresses.

In the above case, when switching from the first round to the second round, the variable winning device 401 is shifted from the open state A to the open state B without returning to the closed state. That is, since the round game of the second round is to open the first winning opening 403, the closed state of the first winning opening 403 is required as the preliminary state. It is considered that it is fulfilled by the open state A implemented in the round game of the round (in the open state A, the first prize winning port 403 is closed (see FIG. 36)), and returns to the closed state. The state is shifted to the open state B without opening.

In this case, compared to the case where the variable winning device 401 is returned to the closed state and then shifted to the open state B, the amount of rotation of the opening/closing member 431 until reaching the open state B can be reduced, and quick state switching is possible. become. In addition, due to the open state A of the first round, the waiting period immediately before starting the second round (the period of waiting for the start of the round game of the second round with the first winning opening 403 closed) is also used. , the transition from the 1st round to the 2nd round can be made seamlessly, or the 2nd round can be started instantly after the 1st round is finished, which can eliminate or shorten the substantial waiting period. .

As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of useless balls (occurrence of events in which game balls enter the out ports 141 and 171), and to promote efficient winning to the variable winning device 401. In addition, the opening/closing execution mode can be advanced at a good tempo, and it is possible to improve the time efficiency when playing a game.

Also, when switching from the second round to the third round, the variable winning device 401 is shifted from the open state B to the open state A without returning to the closed state. As a result, the same effect as in the above case can be expected.

<Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment>
This modification differs from Modifications 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment in that switching between the open states A and B is performed by switching the rotational direction of the opening/closing member 431 from the closed state. This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. FIG. 41 is a perspective view of an opening/closing member 431 according to this modified example, and FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 41, in this modification, the second opening/closing plate 483 of the opening/closing member 431 has a flat plate shape. That is, the second opening/closing plate 483 is configured such that the upper surface portion 483b extends linearly (substantially horizontally) in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The second opening/closing plate 483 has a size capable of covering the passage portion 408 (see FIG. 24(b)) leading to the second winning opening portion 404 from above and closing the passage portion 408 .

The opening/closing member 431 is rotatable in the front-rear direction about a rotation shaft portion 431a provided at the lower end of the first opening/closing plate 432. As the opening/closing member 431 rotates back and forth, the first opening/closing plate 432 and the second opening/closing plate 432 move forward and backward. The opening/closing plate 483 is integrally rotated. Although not shown, the game board 24 is provided with passage forming portions 131 and 161 as in the other embodiments, and outlets 141 and 171 are arranged on both left and right sides of the opening/closing member 431. ing.

Next, the operating mode of the opening/closing member 431 will be described with reference to FIG. Also in this modified example, the open state includes the open state A in which the second prize winning port 404 is in the open state, and the open state B in which the first prize winning port 403 is in the open state. , open state A and open state B can be switched.

In the closed state, as shown in FIG. 42(a), the first opening/closing plate 432 covers the first winning opening 403 from the front and the second opening/closing plate 483 covers the passage 408 from above. As a result, the entry of game balls into the first winning opening 403 and the second winning opening 404 is not permitted, and both winning openings 403 and 404 are closed. In the closed state, the second opening/closing plate 483 protrudes forward, so that the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening/closing plate 483 can receive the game balls flowing down from above. The game ball received by the upper surface portion 483b moves in the horizontal direction by moving along the upper surface portion 483b and is guided to the out ports 141 and 171.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 42(b), when the opening/closing member 431 rotates forward from the closed state, the open state B is reached. In the open state B, the first opening/closing plate 432 is tilted forward to open the first prize winning port 403, and the winning of game balls to the first prize winning port 403 is allowed. Also, the first opening/closing plate 432 falling forward covers the passage portion 408 from above, so that the second winning opening portion 404 is closed.

When a game ball exists on the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening/closing plate 483 when switching from the closed state to the open state B, the downward rotation of the second opening/closing plate 483 accompanies the forward rotation of the opening/closing member 431. As a result, the game ball falls downward, and a prize can be won in the second prize winning opening 404 . That is, the game ball on the second opening/closing plate 483 is the winning opening portion (second It becomes possible to win a prize at the prize winning opening portion 404). Also, such prize winning is not permitted after the switching to the open state B is completed, and is limited to being permitted only during the switching process.

As shown in FIG. 42(c), when the opening/closing member 431 rotates backward from the closed state, the open state A is reached. In the open state A, the passage portion 408 is opened upward by the second opening/closing plate 483 being in the standing posture, and the winning of game balls into the second winning opening portion 404 is permitted. Also, the second opening/closing plate 483 erected covers the first prize winning opening 403 from the front, thereby closing the first prize winning opening 403 .

When the game ball exists on the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening/closing plate 483 at the time of switching from the closed state to the open state A, the second opening/closing plate 483 rotates toward the first winning opening portion 403. As a result, the game ball is guided to the first winning opening portion 403 and can win the first winning opening portion 403 . Winning like this is not permitted after the switching to the open state A is completed, and is limited to being permitted only during the switching process.

The reason why the second opening/closing plate 483 is made flat in this modification is that when the game ball on the second opening/closing plate 483 is guided to the first prize winning opening 403 side, the game ball is moved to the second opening/closing plate. 483 to move to the left and right end sides of the second opening/closing plate 483 and to prevent it from falling off the second opening/closing plate 483. As long as it is within a range in which such falling does not occur or is unlikely to occur, the above-described fourth embodiment can be used. It is good also as a structure which inclines toward the out mouth 141,171 similarly to .

As described above, in this modification, when the opening/closing member 431 rotates forward, it enters the open state B, and when it rotates backward, it enters the open state A. Therefore, the player's interest in the direction in which the opening/closing member 431 operates is increased. It is expected that the player will pay attention to the behavior of the opening/closing member 431 . Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since which of the open states A and B is associated with the movement direction of the opening/closing member 431, it becomes easier for the player to intuitively grasp which state it is, and the easiness of play is improved.

In addition, in the above modification, when the switching to the open state A is completed, the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403 is disabled, but it is not limited to this. It may be possible to win a prize within a range where it is difficult to win a prize compared to the second prize opening portion 404 . Similarly, even when the switching to the open state B is completed, it is not limited to the configuration in which the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 is disabled. The configuration may be such that it is possible to win a prize within a range where it is difficult to win a prize.

<Modification 4 of Fourth Embodiment>
This modified example is based on the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, and devises the mode of switching between the open states A and B during the open/close execution mode. This modified example will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 43(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the open state of each round, and (b) is for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the number of times of switching to the open state A in the opening/closing execution mode. It is an explanatory diagram for.

In this modification, even if a game ball wins into the second winning opening 404, the notification effect shown in FIG. From the effect image displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, it is impossible or difficult to identify whether the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the low probability mode or the high probability mode. It's becoming Further, when the opening/closing member 431 is switched to either the open state A or B in one round game, the state is continued until the end of the round game. Furthermore, in the jackpot type in this modification, as in the case of the first modification of the third embodiment, the explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result, the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result, and the 15R normal jackpot result are set. (See Figure 28).

As shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the opening and closing execution mode when the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified 15R probability variable jackpot result, in the 1st to 4th rounds and the 10th to 15th rounds of the round game, The opening/closing member 431 is rotated forward to be in the open state B, and is rotated backward to be in the open state A in the 5th to 9th rounds of the round game. On the other hand, in the opening and closing execution mode when the jackpot type is assigned to the 15R normal jackpot result, the opening and closing member 431 rotates forward in the round games of the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th to 15th rounds. It is moved to the open state B, and the open/close member 431 is rotated backward to the open state A in the second round, the fourth round, and the sixth round of the round game.

That is, the number of times the variable winning device 401 is switched to the open state A is different between when the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified 15R probability variable jackpot result and when the jackpot type is assigned to the 15R normal jackpot result. More specifically, in the former case, the number of times of switching to the open state A is greater than a predetermined number (four times in this modified example), and in the latter case, the number of times of switching to the open state A is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times. is configured as

Such control, for example, the main control device 81, based on the information about the distribution result of the jackpot type, such as the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 and the flag indicating the distribution result of the jackpot type, of each round This is realized by setting the opening state of the opening/closing member 431 .

With the configuration as described above, it is possible to add interest in estimating the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends from the number of times of switching to the open state A (behavior of the opening/closing member 431). As a result, the player's interest in the behavior of the opening/closing member 431 can be greatly enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be favorably improved.

In addition, in this modification, the number of times of switching to the jackpot type and the open state A was made to correspond one to one, but as shown in FIG. , the number of times of switching to the open state A is more likely to occur than the predetermined number of times, and in the case of a normal 15R jackpot result, the number of times of switching to the open state A may be less than the predetermined number of times. It may be a configuration that makes it easier.

Also, when the jackpot type is assigned to the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result, the number of times of switching to the open state B becomes more than a predetermined number of times, and when the jackpot type is assigned to the normal 15R jackpot result, to the open state B may be configured such that the number of times of switching is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times.

Furthermore, in this modification, for convenience of explanation, when the opening/closing member 431 is switched to either the open state A or B in one round game, the state is continued until the end of the round game. However, as in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment, the opening state of the opening/closing member 431 may be changed during one round game. In this case, the number of times (total number) of switching to the open state A during the open/close execution mode may be different between the case of being assigned to the non-explicit 15R probability variable jackpot result and the case of being assigned to the 15R normal jackpot result. , the number of rounds including switching to the open state A may be different.

<Modification 5 of the fourth embodiment>
This modification targets the round game of the predetermined round, and the open state of the variable winning device 401 when the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified 15R probability variable jackpot result and when the jackpot type is assigned to the 15R normal jackpot result. is different from the modification 4 above. This modified example will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 45(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the jackpot type and the fifteenth round open state.

In the opening and closing execution mode when the jackpot type is assigned to the unspecified 15R probability variable jackpot result in this modified example, the opening and closing member 431 is rotated backward to the open state A in the 15th round round game. On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode when the jackpot type is assigned to the 15R normal jackpot result, the opening/closing member 431 is rotated forward to be in the open state B in the 15th round of the round game. In both cases of the unspecified 15R probability variable jackpot result and the 15R normal jackpot result, the open/close member 431 is rotated forward to be in the open state B in round games other than the 15th round.

With such a configuration, it is possible to add the interest of guessing the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends from the open state of the variable winning device 401 in the fifteenth round. As a result, as in the case of Modification 4, the player's interest in the behavior of the opening/closing member 431 can be significantly increased, and the degree of attention to the game can be favorably increased. In addition, since it is sufficient to pay attention to the behavior of the opening/closing member 431 in a predetermined round, the load on the player can be reduced compared to the case where all round games performed in the opening/closing execution mode are targeted. .

In this modified example, the predetermined round is the 15th round (final round), but it is not limited to this and can be any round. However, if the player can guess the result of the normal jackpot at a relatively early stage of the opening/closing execution mode, the player may be disappointed and may not be able to fully enjoy the rest of the opening/closing execution mode. It is preferable that the predetermined round is the round game at the end of the opening/closing execution mode (the final round or the previous round game).

In addition, in this modified example, the predetermined round is one round game, but it may be composed of a plurality of round games. Furthermore, as in the case of FIG. 45(b), the jackpot type and the opening mode in the predetermined round (which one of the open states A and B) do not correspond one-to-one, and the jackpot type is not specified 15R A configuration may be adopted in which the variable winning device 401 is more likely to be in the open state A in a predetermined round game when sorted to the probability variable jackpot result than when sorted to the 15R normal jackpot result.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs in that the variable winning device 401 according to the fourth embodiment is configured as a variable winning unit in which a plurality of variable winning devices are integrated. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 46(a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 501 and its peripheral configuration, and FIGS. 46(b) and 47 are sectional views of the variable winning unit 501. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), the variable winning unit 501 includes a base body 411 similar to that of the variable winning device 401 according to the fourth embodiment. An upper big prize winning opening 505 that opens forward is formed in the upper part of the base body 411 , and a lower big winning prize opening 506 that opens forward is formed in the lower part of the base body 411 . The upper big prize winning opening 505 and the lower big winning prize opening 506 have the same configuration as the first prize winning opening section 403 and the second winning prize opening section 404 according to the fourth embodiment. is opened and closed by In other words, the upper big winning opening 505 and the opening/closing member 431 constitute the upper variable winning device 502 , and the lower big winning opening 506 and the opening/closing member 431 constitute the lower variable winning device 503 .

The specific operation of the opening/closing member 431 for opening and closing the upper big prize winning port 505 and the lower big winning prize port 506 is the opening and closing of the first prize winning port 403 and the second prize winning port 404 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 46(b) and 47(a) and (b), the closed state in which both the big prize winning openings 505 and 506 are closed and the lower big winning opening 506 is opened. It is possible to switch between an open state A and an open state B in which the upper big winning opening 505 is opened.

In the open state B shown in FIG. 47(b), when the game ball wins the upper big winning hole 505, the winning sensor 403a for the first big winning hole provided in the first ball passage 405 behind the upper big winning hole 505 it is detected. When the winning of game balls into the upper big winning hole 505 is detected in this way, the first number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout control device 97 .

On the other hand, in the open state A shown in FIG. This is detected by the winning sensor 404a. When the winning of game balls into the lower big winning hole 506 is detected in this way, a second number of game balls (for example, 15) larger than the first number are paid out from the payout control device 97 . That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls by making the game balls enter the lower large winning opening 506, and the lower large winning opening 506 wins the upper large winning opening. This is more advantageous for the player than winning 505.

Also, when the game ball is placed on the second opening/closing plate 433 immediately before switching from the closed state to the open states A and B, the game ball falls downward in the process of switching to the open states A and B, It is possible to win a prize in the lower big prize opening 506 . Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode, the game ball that has reached the variable winning unit 501 during the waiting period (period in closed state) between the previous round game and the next round game It is possible to win prizes.

Incidentally, if the previous round game is set to the open state A and the next round game is set to the open state B, the closed state is set in the same manner as in the case of the modification 2 (FIG. 40) of the fourth embodiment. Alternatively, the open state A may be changed to the open state B without returning. This makes it possible to seamlessly transition from the previous round to the next round, or immediately start the next round after the previous round ends, eliminating the substantial waiting period or making it extremely short. be able to.

In this modification, the upper variable winning device 502 and the lower variable winning device 503 are treated as separate variable winning devices. When the game is played, the round game is such that the number of winning game balls into the upper big winning hole 505 becomes a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 10), or the duration of the open state B reaches a predetermined upper limit. It ends based on reaching a period (for example, 30 sec). Similarly, even when the round game is performed in the mode of the open state A (the state in which the lower large winning opening 506 is open), the winning number of game balls to the upper large winning opening 505 is the predetermined upper limit number. or the duration of the open state B reaches the predetermined upper limit period, the round game ends.

In addition, in this modified example, the notification effect (FIG. 32) based on the winning of the game ball into the lower big winning hole 506 may or may not be performed.

<Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment>
This modification differs from the above fifth embodiment in that it does not have the open state A (the state in which the lower big prize winning opening 506 is open) shown in FIG. 47(a). In this modified example, the open state is only the open state B (the state in which the upper big winning port 505 is opened), and it is switched between the closed state (FIG. 46(b)) and the open state B. It is configured to be That is, as in the case of Modified Example 1 (FIG. 34) of the third embodiment, the winning opportunity of the game ball to the lower big winning opening 506 is restricted only when switching to the open state B. As a result, it is possible to emphasize the playability that is advantageous to the player as the number of game balls on the second opening/closing plate 433 increases at the time of switching.

<Sixth Embodiment>
This embodiment is based on the above-described third embodiment, and devises the structure of the ball receiver in the closed state. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48(a) and 48(b) are perspective views of the opening/closing member 631 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 49 is a side view thereof. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted. However, in the present embodiment, even if a game ball enters the second winning port 404, the notification effect is not executed, and the number of game balls to be paid out is determined when the game ball wins the first winning port 403. The number is the same as in the case of That is, the degree of advantage for the player is the same between when the first winning opening 403 is won and when winning the second winning opening 404 .

As shown in FIG. 48( a ), the opening/closing member 631 of this embodiment includes a long plate-like movable plate 651 . Like the first opening/closing plate 432 and the second opening/closing plate 433, the movable plate 651 is arranged with the left-right direction of the game machine as its longitudinal direction. is placed between. One long side portion 652 of the movable plate 651 is provided with a columnar shaft portion (not shown) extending in the longitudinal direction of the movable plate 651 , and the shaft portion is provided on the upper surface portion 433 b of the second opening/closing plate 433 . It is rotatably connected to the bearing portion 653 . That is, as shown in FIG. 49, the movable plate 651 can rotate between the first opening/closing plate 432 and the second opening/closing plate 433 about the rotation axis extending in the same direction as the rotation axis of the opening/closing member 431. configuration. As a result, the movable plate 651 overlaps the front surface portion 432b of the first opening/closing plate 432 from the front (FIG. 48(a)) and overlaps the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433 from above (see FIG. 48A). 48(b)) can be switched. As shown in FIG. 48B, the movable plate 651 has a size capable of covering substantially the entire surface of the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a drive source such as a solenoid for driving the movable plate 651 is not provided.

In this embodiment, closed state A shown in FIG. 48A and closed state B shown in FIG. have. These closed states A and B differ in whether the movable plate 651 overlaps the second opening/closing plate 433 from above. Specifically, the movable plate 651 does not overlap the second opening/closing plate 433. The case is closed state A, and the overlapping case is closed state B.

As shown in FIG. 48A, in the closed state A, the movable plate 651 is in an upright state, so that the first surface portion 654 of the movable plate 651 located on the side of the second opening/closing plate 433 is exposed forward. In addition, the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433 is exposed upward. In this case, the first surface portion 654 of the movable plate 651 is flush with the front surface portion 411a of the base body 411 (the front surface of the game board 24; see FIG. 24(b)), or positioned closer to the back side of the game machine than the front surface portion 411a. , and a game ball can pass in front of the first surface portion 654 .

Therefore, in the above case, the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion in the first mode. The upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433 has a smooth planar shape, and when the game ball moves on the upper surface portion 433b, it is difficult for the game ball to be caught or the like. In addition, the first surface portion 654 of the movable plate 651 also has a smooth planar shape, which also suppresses catching of game balls.

An engaging portion 656 is provided on a surface portion 655 of the movable plate 651 on the rotation tip side so as to protrude from the surface portion 655 in the rotation radial direction of the movable plate 651 . The engaging portion 656 engages with an engaged portion 657 (see FIG. 49) provided on the base body 411 side of the variable prize winning device 401 when the movable plate 651 is in the upright posture. As a result, the movable plate 651 can be held in the standing posture.

As shown in FIG. 48(b), in the closed state B, the movable plate 651 is tilted toward the second opening/closing plate 433, thereby exposing the front surface portion 432b of the first opening/closing plate 432 forward and In the second opening/closing plate 433, the second surface portion 658 located on the first opening/closing plate 432 side is exposed upward. In this case, the second aspect is achieved in which the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 functions as a ball receiving portion. The second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 is provided with a plurality of ridges 660 extending in a direction that intersects the longitudinal direction of the movable plate 651. These ridges 660 are the projections according to other embodiments. Like the ridge 215, it functions as a deceleration means. That is, when the game ball is placed on the second surface portion 658, the movement of the game ball in the direction toward the out ports 141 and 171 is blocked by the ridge portion 660, and the game ball is decelerated.

A plurality of grooves 661 are provided on the front surface portion 432 b of the first opening/closing plate 432 so as to correspond to the protrusions 660 . When the opening/closing member 631 is in the closed state A, the grooves 661 can accommodate the respective ridges 660 .

Next, the operation mode of the opening/closing member 631 in the normal game state and the opening/closing execution mode will be described. Although not shown, the game board 24 in this embodiment is also provided with the passage forming portions 131 and 161 (see FIG. 5), and the game balls flowing down the game area PE are variable winning prizes. It is aggregated in the arrangement area of the device 401 .

First, the normal game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 48(a) and 49. FIG. In the normal game state, the state of the opening/closing member 631 is maintained in the closed state in which the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 are closed. In this case, the movable plate 651 is held in the standing posture by the engagement between the engaging portion 656 and the engaged portion 657, and the opening/closing member 631 is brought into the closed state A. Under this closed state A, the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening/closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion. , and rolls on the upper surface portion 483b. As already explained, since the upper surface portion 483b has a smooth planar shape, the game ball moves smoothly on the upper surface portion 483b and reaches the out ports 141 and 171 arranged on both left and right sides of the opening/closing member 431. be induced quickly.

Next, the case where the opening/closing execution mode is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation mode of the opening/closing member 631 in the opening/closing execution mode. Here, for the sake of convenience, it is assumed that the variable winning device 401 is opened once in one round game.

In the first round of the round game, first, the opening/closing member 631 is rotated forward from the closed state A described above, and the first winning opening 403 is opened (FIGS. 50(a) and (b)). . At this time, the first opening/closing plate 432 presses the movable plate 651 from behind, so that the engaging portion 656 is disengaged from the engaged portion 657 , and the movable plate 651 rotates forward together with the opening/closing member 631 . Thereafter, when the first opening/closing plate 432 rotates to the open position, the movable plate 651 rotates downward due to its own weight. As a result, the movable plate 651 is separated from the first opening/closing plate 432 and comes into contact with the second opening/closing plate 433 .

After that, when the end condition of the round game (the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches a predetermined upper limit number or the opening period reaches a predetermined upper limit period), the opening/closing member 631 50(c)). At that time, the movable plate 651 rotates together with the opening/closing member 631 so as to lean against the second opening/closing plate 433 . As a result, when returning to the closed state, the movable plate 651 overlaps the second opening/closing plate 433 from above, and the closed state of the opening/closing member 631 is switched to the closed state B. FIG.

In the closed state B, the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 functions as a ball receiving portion. It falls and rolls on the second surface portion 658 . As already explained, since the second surface portion 658 is provided with the ridge portion 660 as a deceleration means, the moving speed of the game ball moving on the second surface portion 658 is reduced by the ridge portion 660. be. Therefore, the time required for the game ball to reach the out ports 141 and 171 is longer than in the case of the closed state A, and the staying period on the opening/closing member 631 is lengthened.

Then, when the round game of the second round is started, the opening/closing member 631 is rotated forward again to switch from the closed state to the open state (FIG. 50(d)). Along with this, the game ball on the movable plate 651 falls downward and wins the second winning opening 404 . As described above, the waiting period immediately before the second round is closed state B, and the stay period of the game ball on the opening/closing member 631 (movable plate 651) is lengthened. Therefore, the probability that the opening/closing member 631 is switched to the open state before the game ball on the ball receiving portion reaches the out ports 141, 171 increases, and the winning probability of the game ball to the second winning port portion 404 increases. In other words, the closed state B is more advantageous to the player than the closed state A.

After that, when the end condition of the round game is established, the opening/closing member 631 is rotated in the opposite direction again to return to the closed state (FIG. 50(e)). In this case as well, the game ball stays on the open/close member 631 (movable plate 651) for a longer period of time as in the case of the end of the first round. Thereafter, similar processing is repeated until the end of the 14th round.

When the 15th round game is started, the opening/closing member 631 is rotated backward from the closed state B (FIG. 50(e)) (FIG. 50(f)). As a result, the first opening/closing plate 433 closes the first winning opening 403 and opens the second winning opening 404 . In this case, the game ball placed on the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 at the start of the backward rotation wins the first winning opening portion 403 . Further, as the opening/closing member 631 rotates backward, the movable plate 651 falls backward and rotates toward the first opening/closing plate 432 . After that, when the end condition of the round game is established, the opening/closing member 631 rotates forward from the state of FIG. 50(f) and returns to the closed state (FIG. 50(g)). In this case, the movable plate 651 leans against the first opening/closing plate 432 and rises together with the first opening/closing plate 432, whereby switching to the closed state A is performed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

It is possible to switch between the case where the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433 functions as a ball receiving portion (closed state A) and the case where the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 functions as a ball receiving portion (closed state B). It is configured to be able to change the easiness of movement of the game ball in the ball receiving portion in a predetermined direction (the direction toward the out ports 141 and 171).

In order to increase the winning efficiency of game balls to the big winning hole 402 in the open/close execution mode (reduce the number of out balls), the movement speed of the game balls passing through the ball receiving portion is reduced, and the game balls are placed on the ball receiving portion. A longer stay is desirable. However, if the ball receiving portion is designed to greatly decelerate the game ball, the effect is exhibited even in the normal game state, so the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion is stagnant in the normal game state, and the ball receiving portion This can lead to ball clogging in and around the area. For this reason, it is necessary to suppress the degree of deceleration to a low level, or to have a structure in which the game ball does not pass over the ball receiving portion in the normal game state, which restricts the design of the game machine.

In this regard, in this embodiment, by switching between the closed state A and the closed state B, it is possible to change the easiness of movement of the game ball on the ball receiving portion, and to relax the above restriction. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the flow of game balls on the ball receiving portion is stagnated, while in the normal game state, the flow of game balls on the ball receiving portion can be smoothed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the winning efficiency of the game ball to the big winning hole 402 in the open/close execution mode while avoiding the influence on the normal game state.

A movable plate 651 is arranged between the first opening/closing plate 432 and the second opening/closing plate 433 in a rotatable state. It is configured to switch. In this case, switching control of the opening/closing member 631 (opening/closing control of the variable winning device 401) and switching control of the ball receiving portion can be collectively performed. As a result, the control processing can be simplified and the processing load on the main controller 81 can be reduced as compared with the case where these switching controls are performed separately. In addition, "mechanically interlocking" means interlocking without an electric actuator intervening.

Forward rotation and backward rotation of the opening/closing member 631 are provided as transition modes from the closed state to the open state. When the opening/closing member 631 rotates forward, the closed state B occurs, and when the opening/closing member 631 rotates backward, the closed state. A configuration was adopted. In this case, since the turning direction of the opening/closing member 631 corresponds to the mode of the closed state, it is thought that a player who is interested in which of the closed states A and B will be will pay attention to the movement of the opening/closing member 631. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, it is possible to control which of the closed states A and B is to be set by controlling which of the forward rotation and the rearward rotation is to be performed in each opening/closing control. As a result, it is possible to suppress the uniformity of the switching pattern of the closed state, such as alternate switching between the closed states A and B each time the opening/closing control is performed, and to diversify the state switching pattern. Further, in the final round of the opening/closing execution mode, by rotating the opening/closing member 631 backward, it is possible to start the normal game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends in the state returned to the closed state A. As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the ball receiving portion in the normal game state, and it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as ball clogging.

In the above embodiment, only the 15th round (final round) is in the closed state A, and all other rounds are in the closed state B; good. In this case, in order to diversify the rounds in closed state B (or closed state A), a plurality of jackpot results are provided as the results of sorting the jackpot types, and depending on the jackpot results, there are rounds in closed state B (or closed state A). A variable configuration is preferable. For example, in the case of the jackpot result A, the closed state B is set in each of the 1st round to the 14th round (the open state A is set only in the 15th round), and in the case of the jackpot result B, the 1st round to the 10th round. It is possible to have closed state B in each roll (closed state A in the remaining rounds), and closed state A in all rounds in the case of a jackpot outcome C. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to grasp in advance the round in which the opening/closing member 631 is turned backward (the round in which the opening/closing member 631 rotates backward) in the closed state A, so that the interest in the movement of the opening/closing member 631 can be further increased, and the game becomes monotonous. It is also effective for suppression.

In addition, the mode of the closed state in the opening/closing execution mode is made different between when the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode and when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, thereby suggesting the lottery mode. may be In this case, the closed state in a predetermined round in the opening/closing execution mode should be different between when the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode and when it is the low probability mode. As a result, not only is it possible to enjoy whether or not the closed state B is likely to occur to the big prize winning opening 402, but also to predict the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished based on which closed state it will be. can give you enjoyment. In this case, it is assumed that, in the game round or the opening/closing execution mode that results in a big win, the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 or the speaker does not indicate or indicate the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished. good. In the case of performing the notification, it is preferable that the notification is not performed until the predetermined round in the opening/closing execution mode including the game round resulting in the big win is completed, but after the start of the round to be performed after the current round. Further, instead of the lottery mode, the support mode may be suggested after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

<Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment>
This modification differs from the sixth embodiment in the structure of the opening/closing member, and more specifically, is based on the first embodiment. This modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. FIG. 51(a) is a front view of the variable prize winning device 201 and its peripheral configuration according to this modification, (b) is a perspective view of the opening/closing member 731, and FIGS. 52 and 53 are AA of FIG. 51(a). It is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 401 corresponding to a line cross-section. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the opening/closing member 731 according to this modification includes a plate-like shutter portion 732 so as to cover the big winning opening 202 (see FIG. 7(b)). An upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 has a smooth planar shape like the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433 according to the sixth embodiment. The opening/closing member 731 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and has a protruding position that protrudes forward from the front surface portion 211a (the front surface of the game board 24) of the base body 211 to the front of the game machine, and retreats backward from the protruding position. Then, it can be displaced to a retracted position where the forward projection of the game machine is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), a support portion 734 is provided on an upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 so as to stand upward. The support portion 734 is arranged near the rear end portion 732b of the shutter portion 732, and has a front portion 734a provided with a plurality of extension portions 735 extending forward. The extensions 735 have the same length in the front-rear direction, and the front ends 735a of the extensions 735 are located behind the front ends 732c of the shutter 732. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 51(a), each extending portion 735 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view from the front of the gaming machine, and is arranged at regular intervals. On the other hand, the base body 211 is formed with a plurality of slits 737 corresponding to the extensions 735 . Each slit portion 737 penetrates the base body 211 in the thickness direction, and each extension portion 735 can be inserted through each slit portion 737 from behind the base body 211 .

52(a) and a closed state B shown in FIG. 52(b). These closed states A and B differ in the forward sliding amount (moving distance) of the opening/closing member 731 from the retracted position. is getting bigger.

In the closed state A shown in FIG. 52(a), the front end portion 735a of each extending portion 735 is flush with the front surface portion 211a (the front surface of the game board 24) of the base body 211 or is slightly closer to the back surface of the game machine than the front surface portion 211a. It is located on the side. Therefore, in the closed state A, the flow of game balls moving on the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 is not or is less likely to be hindered by the extension portion 735. FIG. In addition, as already described, since the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732 has a smooth planar shape, the game ball moves smoothly on the upper surface portion 732a, and the out-shaped openings arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening/closing member 731 It is quickly guided to the mouths 141 and 171.

On the other hand, in the closed state B shown in FIG. 52(b), the front end portion 735a of each extension portion 735 protrudes forward from the front surface portion 211a of the base body 211 (the front surface of the game board 24). Therefore, in the closed state B, each extending portion 735 functions as an obstructing portion or obstructing portion that obstructs the flow of the game ball moving on the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732, and the extending portion 735 prevents the game ball from moving. slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the game ball to reach the out ports 141 and 171 is longer than in the case of the closed state A, and the staying period on the opening/closing member 731 is lengthened.

Also in this modification, the opening/closing member 731 is maintained in the closed state A in the normal game state, and the game balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable prize winning device 401 are quickly guided to the out ports 141 and 171 . On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball stays on the opening/closing member 731 in the closed state B in each waiting period of the 1st round to the 14th round, and the staying period of the game ball on the opening/closing member 731 is lengthened. At the start of the next round, the game balls existing on the opening/closing member 731 fall downward as the opening/closing member 731 retreats to the retracted position as shown in FIG. Win a prize. After that, when the 15th round game ends, the closed state of the opening/closing member 731 is switched to the closed state A.

Thus, also in this modification, it is possible to change the easiness of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction (the direction toward the out ports 141 and 171) in the ball receiving portion. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the flow of game balls on the ball receiving portion is stagnated, while in the normal game state, the flow of game balls on the ball receiving portion can be smoothed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the winning efficiency of the game ball to the big winning opening 202 in the open/close execution mode while avoiding the influence on the normal game state.

In the above configuration, switching between the open states A and B is performed by retracting the extending portion 735, but in the case of the closed state A, the extension portion 735 extends with a smaller amount of protrusion than in the case of the open state B. A front end portion 735 a of the portion 735 may protrude forward from the base body 211 .

In the above configuration, only the 15th round (final round) is in the closed state A, and all other rounds are in the closed state B, but the closed state A may also be set in rounds other than the 15th round. In addition, the round in which the closed state B (or the closed state A) is set is different between when the lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode and when the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, whereby the lottery mode is changed. It is good also as a structure which suggests.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment is based on the above-described third embodiment, and differs from each of the above-described embodiments in that a third operation opening 803 is provided in place of the second prize winning opening 404 . The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 54(a) is a front view of the winning unit 801 and its peripheral configuration according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 54(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB of (a). In this figure, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a winning unit 801 in which a variable winning device 802 and a third operation opening 803 are integrated. The prize winning unit 801 has a base body 811 fitted to the game board 24 , and a variable prize winning device 802 is arranged on the base body 811 . The variable winning device 802 includes a first winning opening 403, an opening/closing member 431 for opening and closing the first winning opening 403, and a back structure for guiding and detecting a game ball that has won the first winning opening 403. It is composed of a 1-ball path 405 and a prize sensor 403a) for the first big prize hole.

A third operating port 803 is arranged in the lower part of the base body 811 (below the variable winning device 802). The third operating port 803 opens forward, and its size is such that a plurality of game balls can pass through it at the same time. As shown in FIG. 54( b ), a ball passage 821 is provided on the rear side of the base body 811 so as to communicate with the third operating port 803 . The ball passage 821 extends rearward, and the game ball that has entered the third operating port 803 flows into the second ball passage 421 and is guided rearward along the passage bottom surface 821a. In the middle position thereof, a winning sensor 803a for the third working opening for detecting a game ball that has won the third working opening 803 is arranged. The third working opening winning sensor 803a is electrically connected to the main controller 81, and the main controller 81 controls the third working opening 803 based on the detection information output from the third working opening winning sensor 803a. Determines whether or not there is a prize to be won.

When the winning to the third operation port 803 is specified by the main control device 81, each numerical information (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS) is acquired and stored in the second result display portion reservation area Rb provided in the reservation ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 as reservation information. That is, the third working port 803, like the lower working port 34, corresponds to the pattern displayed in the second result display section BS in a variable/stop manner. In the following description, when a prize is won in the lower working port 34 or the third working port 803, the pattern variably displayed on the second result display unit BS is changed to the first result display unit when a prize is won in the upper working port 33. The former is sometimes referred to as the second special pattern and the latter is sometimes referred to as the first special pattern in order to distinguish it from the patterns that are variably displayed in the AS.

In addition, when the winning to the third working port 803 is specified, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97, for example, two prize balls are issued as in the case of winning to the lower working port 34. is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), on the left and right sides of the third operation opening 803 in the lower part of the base body 811, out openings 806 for discharging some of the game balls that have flowed into the passage portion 408 are provided. there is The out port 806 opens forward, and its size is such that one game ball can pass through it.

Next, distribution of jackpot types according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the upper working port 33 (first special drawing side), and (b) is for the lower working port 34 or the third working port 803 (second special drawing side). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a sorting table shown in FIG.

When a jackpot result is obtained based on the winning to the upper operation port 33, the type of the jackpot result is distributed using the first distribution table shown in FIG. 55(a). In the first distribution table, 5R probability variable jackpot results and 5R normal jackpot results are set as types of jackpot results. All of these have five rounds to be executed.

When a jackpot result is obtained based on the winning to the lower working port 34 or the third working port 803, the type of the jackpot result is distributed using the second distribution table shown in FIG. 55(b). In the second distribution table, 15R probability variable jackpot results and 15R normal jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results. All of these have 15 rounds to be executed.

In this way, the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the opening/closing execution mode in which the jackpot result is obtained based on the winning to the lower operating port 34 or the third operating port 803 rather than the jackpot result based on the winning to the upper operating port 33. The number of rounds played tends to increase, and more prize balls are expected. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery on the side of the second special symbol than to receive the lottery on the side of the first special symbol.

Incidentally, in the opening/closing execution mode, regardless of whether it is the first special figure or the second special figure, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Also, while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the variable display of the pattern is not executed for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see step S301 in FIG. 14).

Here, data setting processing according to the present embodiment will be described. This processing is performed in step S304 of the game round control processing (FIG. 14), and is executed by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81. FIG.

In the data setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN stored in the second result display holding area Rb is "0". When the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", data setting processing for the first result display unit AS is executed, and when the second start pending memory number RbN is not "0", the second result is displayed. Execute data setting processing for partial BS.

In the data setting process for the first result display portion AS, the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion reservation area Ra is decremented by one, and Move the stored data to the execution area AE. After that, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the reserved area Ra for the first result display section to the lower area side is executed.

Also in the data setting process for the second result display section BS, the second start-up reservation storage number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb is decremented by one, and the second result display section reservation area Rb The data stored in the first area are moved to the execution area AE, and the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the second result display area Rb are shifted.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the pending information is stored in both the first result display portion pending area Ra and the second result display portion pending area Rb (FIG. 11), the second result display Lottery processing based on the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb (lower operation port 34 or reservation information stored corresponding to the winning of the third operation port 803), that is, the lottery processing on the side of the second special figure is executed with priority.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of each game in the normal game state and the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in both the normal game state and the opening/closing execution mode, refer to FIG. Since it is the same as the case of the first embodiment described above, the description is omitted.

In the normal game state, the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 802 is not executed, and the opening/closing member 431 is maintained in the closed position for closing the first winning opening 403 (FIGS. 54(a) and (b)). In this case, the game ball cannot pass in front of the second opening/closing plate 433 of the opening/closing member 431 and cannot flow into the passage portion 408 below the second opening/closing plate 433 . Therefore, no winning to the third operation port 803 occurs.

Incidentally, when the result of the opening lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35 (Fig. 4) is an open result, the electric accessory 34a provided corresponding to the lower operation opening 34 is opened. , a game ball can be won in the lower operation port 34.例文帳に追加This is the same whether the support mode is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, thereby ensuring the opportunity to receive the lottery process on the side of the second special figure in the normal game state. As already described, the probability of winning a prize at the lower opening 34 is higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning device 802 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then switching control (opening/closing control) from the open state to the closed state is performed at least once. In the switching control, the opening/closing member 431 rotates forward from the closed position, thereby switching the first prize winning opening 403 from the closed state to the open state, thereby allowing the game balls to enter the first winning opening 403. Become. At this time, if a game ball is placed on the second opening/closing plate 433 immediately before switching, the game ball falls downward from the second opening/closing plate 433 as the opening/closing member 431 rotates forward. As a result, the game ball flows into the passage portion 408, and the winning to the third operating port 803 becomes possible.

By the way, since the out port 806 is provided on both left and right sides of the third operation port 803, it is possible to prevent part of the game balls flowing into the passage portion 408 from entering the third operation port 803. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the passage 408 is prevented from always entering the third operation opening 803, and the player's interest in the whereabouts of the game ball that has fallen from the second opening/closing plate 433 can be maintained. Become. Note that the out port 806 does not necessarily have to be provided on both sides of the third operation port 803, and may be provided only on one side.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A third actuation opening 803 corresponding to the second special figure advantageous to the player is provided, and a structure is adopted in which winning to the third actuation opening 803 can occur in the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, the player not only obtains a large amount of prize balls based on the winning to the variable winning device 802 by shifting the game state to the opening and closing execution mode, but also wins or loses lottery on the second special figure side in the subsequent game. It becomes possible to acquire the right to receive (lottery for the advantageous side). On the other hand, in the normal game state, the third operation opening 803 is configured so that no prize is won, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being played under excessively advantageous conditions for the player. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to add value to the opening/closing execution mode and improve the attractiveness of the opening/closing execution mode while avoiding affecting the normal game state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state (except when the support mode is a high frequency support mode such as during time saving or variable probability), it is difficult to win a prize to the operation port on the side of the second special figure It is also effective for a game machine configured. That is, in such a game machine, the opening/closing execution mode is started in a state where there is a hold on the first special figure side and no reservation on the second special figure side, and the opening/closing execution mode ends in that state. obtain. In this case, even if the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, in the game after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning lottery on the first special figure side (lottery on the disadvantageous side) is first performed. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, even if the opening/closing execution mode is started in a state where there is a hold on the first special figure side and no hold on the second special figure side, the opening/closing execution mode is still being executed. By winning a prize to the third operation port 803, it is possible to replenish the reservation on the second special figure side. As a result, the lottery process on the side of the second special figure can be easily performed first, and the ease of play can be improved.

The configuration is such that the third operation port 803 is arranged downstream of the variable winning device 802 . For example, when the third operating port 803 is configured to be located upstream of the variable winning device 802, the game ball does not reach the variable winning device 802 due to the winning of the third operating port 803, resulting in a variable winning device There is a risk that the winning of the 802 will be hindered. In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the third operation opening 803 is located downstream of the variable winning device 802, it is possible to prevent the winning of the variable winning device 802 from being hindered by the winning of the third operation opening 803. be done. As a result, while suppressing the influence of the winning state of the game ball to the variable winning device 802, it is possible to generate the winning to the third operation opening 803 in the opening/closing execution mode.

The lower operation port 34 is arranged upstream of the variable winning device 802 (second opening/closing plate 433). According to this configuration, as the flow of game balls is restricted by the second opening/closing plate 433, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that even winning of the game balls to the lower operation opening 34 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to limit the winning to the third operation opening 803 while suppressing the influence on the winning condition of the game ball to the lower operation opening 34 .

In the above-described embodiment, the game ball cannot enter the third operation opening 803 in the normal game state. . As such a configuration, for example, the distance D1 between the front end portion 433a of the second opening and closing plate 433 and the window panel 62 is set to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, and when the game ball passes near the window panel 62, the third operation opening 803 can be won, or a part of the game ball flowing down the game area PE can be directly led out to the passage part 408 or the third operation port 803 without passing through the second opening and closing plate 433 can be considered.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the variable prize winning device of the type that opens and closes the large prize opening by moving the shutter back and forth or rotating the opening and closing member back and forth has been exemplified. good. The side-opening type variable winning device includes a protruding portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24 and has an opening as a ball-entering portion, and a protruding portion that is provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion and intersects the game board 24. and a movable blade as a movable body that rotates about the axis of the direction, and by rotating the movable blade, the degree of opening of the opening is changed to an open state (a game ball can be entered into the ball entering portion). Or a first state where it is easy to enter a ball) and a closed state (a second state in which a game ball cannot enter the ball entering portion or is more difficult to enter than the first state).

(2) The shutter 216 in the first embodiment and the second opening/closing plate 433 in the third embodiment have a symmetrical mountain shape so as to provide means for guiding game balls to the out ports 141 and 171. However, it is not limited to this as long as it can fulfill the guidance function. For example, it may be configured to be inclined only in one direction (FIG. 56(a)), may be configured to be asymmetrical in left and right inclination (FIG. 56(b)), or may be a non-inclined portion such as a trapezoidal shape. It may be a configuration including In the case of FIGS. 56(a) and 56(b), when the game ball enters the shutter 216 in the direction of arrow A (for example, when hitting left) and when entering in the direction of arrow B (for example, when hitting right). The required period until the game ball on the shutter 216 reaches the out port 171 is different between the case of hitting and the case of hitting, and it is possible to provide a difference in the degree of advantage.

Further, the number, interval, height, shape, etc. of the protrusions 215 as decelerating means may be varied between the left and right sides of the shutter 216 or the second opening/closing plate 433, so that the deceleration rate may differ between the left and right sides.

(3) The shutter 216 in the first embodiment and the second opening/closing plate 433 in the third embodiment are configured to have an inclination downward toward the outlets 141 and 171, but the fourth embodiment It may be flat like the second opening/closing plate 433 in the form of . Further, the second opening/closing plate 433 in the fourth embodiment, the movable plate 651 and the second opening/closing plate 433 in the sixth embodiment, and the shutter portion 732 in the seventh embodiment are flat. The shutter 216 in the first embodiment may have a configuration that slopes downward toward the outlets 141 and 171 . In this case, it is also possible to configure as shown in FIGS. 56(a) and (b).

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the outlets 141 and 171 are configured to open toward the variable winning device, but may be configured to open upward or forward. In particular, in the case of a configuration that opens forward, it becomes easier to visually see how the game ball enters the out port and flows to the back side in a front view from the front of the game machine, and the game ball is discharged from the game area PE. It is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize the

(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the front part of the flow path forming part 131, 161, the guide path that guides the game ball entering the out port 141, 171 and the out port 141, 171 to the back side of the game board 24 The parts overlapping with are made opaque, and the openings of the out ports 141 and 171 and the flow of game balls entering the out ports 141 and 171 are made invisible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine, but the above parts have transparency. Alternatively, the openings of the out ports 141 and 171 may be configured to be visible or easily visible from the front of the gaming machine.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the suspension information is acquired based on the winning of the operation ports 33 and 34, and the suspension information is stored with a predetermined number (4 pieces) as the upper limit. may not be stored. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the configuration. This is the same for the winning to the through gate 35 as well.

(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, up to four pieces of pending information based on winnings to the upper working port 33 are stored. may Also, the upper limit number of pieces of pending information to be stored based on each winning to the lower opening 34 and the through gate 35 may be less than 4 or may be 5 or more. Further, the upper limit storage number of the pending information based on the winning to the operation ports 33, 34 and the through gate 35 may be different.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, regardless of which of the left region PE2 and the right region PE3 the game ball flows down (regardless of the launching force of the game ball), the game ball is led to the variable winning device. However, only when the game ball flows down either the left side area PE2 or the right side area PE3, it may be configured to lead to the variable winning device.

(9) In the above-described third to seventh embodiments, the protruding portion as the deceleration means is provided on the opening/closing member (ball receiving portion). It may be provided at other locations. In addition, the game ball is decelerated by creating a step with the protruding portion, and the length of stay of the game ball on the opening/closing member is lengthened. By doing so, the length of stay may be lengthened.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, a variable prize winning device that opens and closes when a big hit results as the "variable ball entry means" is provided, but the "variable ball entry means" is not limited to this. For example, it may be a variable operation opening (the electric accessory 34a and the lower operation opening 34) that is opened and closed based on the result of the electric opening lottery. The same applies to the "movable body" and the "entering part" that is opened and closed by the movable body, and the electric accessory 34a and the lower operation opening 34 may correspond to each other. By the way, the operation opening to be opened and closed by the electric accessory 34a does not necessarily have to be on the "lower" side, and its placement position is arbitrary.

(11) In the second embodiment, when the variable winning device 301 is in the closed state, shielding means may be provided that faces the out ports 141 and 171 and covers and shields the openings of the out ports 141 and 171. good. As a result, the out ports 141 and 171 can be made less conspicuous, and their presence can be further diluted. The shielding means is preferably provided on the opening/closing door 305 (more specifically, provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface portion 305b of the opening/closing door 305). In this case, in conjunction with the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 305, the shielding means shields the outlets 141 and 171 (the state facing the outlets 141 and 171) and the state in which it is released (the outlets 141 and 171). 171).

(12) Out ports 141 and 171 may be omitted in the second embodiment. As a result, all the game balls collected in the arrangement area of the variable winning device 301 can be made to win the variable winning device 301 .

(13) In the third to seventh embodiments, the ball receiving portion (or ball receiving means) is provided integrally with the opening/closing member (movable body), but these are separated and arranged separately. may be configured. In this case, a transmission means such as a link mechanism for transmitting the movement of the movable body to the ball receiving portion is provided, and the ball receiving portion switches between the ball receiving state and the falling state for dropping the game ball mechanically linked to the movable body. may be configured. Further, a ball receiving driving means for driving the ball receiving portion is provided so that the ball receiving portion switches from the ball receiving state to the falling state in accordance with the switching of the movable body from the closed state to the open state. may be configured to control the In the latter case, the control of the ball receiving drive means should preferably be performed by the main controller 81, since the cooperation (synchronization) with the control of the movable body is simplified. When the upper variable winning device 502 and the lower variable winning device 503 are provided as in the fifth embodiment, two driving units are provided for the variable winning devices 502 and 503, and one of them may be used as a driving portion for driving the opening/closing member 431, and the other may be used as a driving portion for driving the ball receiving portion.

(14) In the third embodiment, the second winning opening 404 is more advantageous for the player than the first winning opening 403, but the first winning opening 403 is the second winning opening. A configuration that is more advantageous than 404 may be used. Also, the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 may be configured so as not to provide a difference in the degree of advantage. In this case, the detecting means (sensor) for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403 and the detecting means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 are made common, and one detection is performed. You may comprise by a means. In this case, the detection means is preferably provided at the junction of the first ball passage 405 and the second ball passage 421 or downstream thereof.

(15) In the third embodiment, it has a plurality of waiting periods (round interval periods) with different lengths, for example, a long-term mode in which the waiting period between rounds is relatively long, and a relatively A short-term mode (shorter than the long-term mode) may be set. When the standby period is set to a short-term mode, the probability that the next round is started (switched to an open state) before the game ball on the ball receiving part reaches the out ports 141, 171 is higher than in the case of the long-term mode. increases, and the winning probability of the game ball to the second winning opening 404 increases. That is, it is possible to make a difference in the ease of winning the second prize winning opening 404 depending on the length of the waiting period.

As such a configuration, for example, whether it is a variable jackpot or not, whether it was a jackpot by winning a prize to which operation port (whether it was a jackpot in the first special figure or the second special figure), it was a jackpot Depending on the game state at the time (whether it is in the high-probability mode, whether it is in the high-frequency support mode, etc.), the waiting period in the opening/closing execution mode can be lengthened or shortened. Specifically, for example, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the system shifts to an opening and closing execution mode in which the waiting period of a predetermined round consisting of one or more rounds is a long-term mode, while in the case of a probability variable jackpot result, a predetermined A configuration is conceivable in which a shift is made to an opening/closing execution mode in which the waiting period of the round is a short period. It should be noted that the waiting period setting process can be performed in step S515 of the big winning opening opening/closing process (FIG. 16). Also, in the above fourth to seventh embodiments, a plurality of waiting periods with different lengths may be provided.

(16) In the above-described third embodiment, a general variable winning device (second variable winning device ) may be provided. In this case, when the result of sorting the jackpot types (the result of the lottery process based on the winning to the operation ports 33 and 34) is the first result, the opening/closing execution mode for opening/closing the variable winning device 401 is entered. If the sorting result is a second result different from the first result, it is preferable to shift to an opening/closing execution mode for opening/closing the second variable winning device. Depending on which variable prize winning device is opened or closed, the degree of advantage for the player can be differentiated, and the amusement is improved. The same applies to the above fourth to seventh embodiments.

(17) In the above-described third embodiment, the opening/closing control (the variable winning device is changed from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state) may be performed multiple times in one round game. Compared to the case where the opening/closing control is executed only once, the frequency of winning the game balls in the second winning opening 404 is increased, which is preferable for expanding the winning opportunities to the second winning opening 404 . In this case, in the waiting period between the opening and closing control (the period of waiting for the start of the next opening and closing control with the variable winning device closed), in order to secure the time grace for the game ball to reach the second opening and closing plate 433, the above It is preferable that the waiting period is longer than the game ball shooting cycle (0.6 sec).

Furthermore, it is good also as a structure in which the round game which can perform opening-and-closing control multiple times, and the round game which can perform opening-and-closing control only once are set. In this case, the frequency of winning the second winning opening 404 can be made different between the former round game and the latter round game. The former round game can be more advantageous to the player than the latter round game under the configuration functioning as an advantageous winning hole.

The upper limit of the open period of each time when the opening and closing control is performed multiple times should be shorter than the upper limit of the opening period when the opening and closing control is performed once (in other words, when the opening and closing control is performed multiple times short-term opening is executed multiple times, and long-term opening is executed when opening/closing control is executed once). With such a configuration, although it is a round game in which opening and closing control can be executed multiple times, the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 401 reaches the upper limit number in the first opening, and the second time. is suppressed. In that sense, at least the upper limit of the opening period of the initial opening should be shorter than the upper limit of the opening period when opening/closing control is performed once.

(18) In the third embodiment, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 to perform the notification effect (FIGS. 32(b) and (c)). The notification effect may be a light emitting effect using a light emitting means such as an LED, or may be a character effect using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for moving effect. Furthermore, it does not necessarily have to be visual, and may be auditory, for example, using sound effects. Further, another display device may be provided in addition to the pattern display device 41, and the notification effect may be displayed on the display screen of the display device. These are the same for the introduction effect of FIG. 32(a) and the end effect of FIG. 32(d).

(19) In the above-described third embodiment, the game state after the completion of the open/close execution mode is clearly indicated in the notification effect, but it may be suggested.

(20) In the third embodiment, as the specific notification based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404, the notification effect of the lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is performed. The form of is not limited to this. For example, it may suggest or indicate the support mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, or it may indicate that a game ball has entered the second winning opening 404 or that the number of winnings has reached a predetermined number. Based on this, the effect display such as the background image may be changed, or a special effect image may be displayed.

In addition, the first notification is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 403, and the second notification different from the first notification is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening 404. may be When the distance between the two winning openings 403 and 404 is close, the player may not be able to clearly identify which winning opening the game ball has won. can be suppressed. As in the case of (18) above, the notification in this case does not necessarily have to be visual, and may be auditory. Also, the first notification and the second notification may be performed by the same notification means, or may be performed by different notification means.

(21) In the third embodiment, when the opening/closing member 431 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion (second opening/closing plate 433) Although it is configured to be able to win, for example, when the player operates an operation means such as a production button that the player can operate, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is moved to the second winning opening portion 404. A configuration may be adopted in which a prize can be won. In addition, the ball-entering section that allows the game ball received by the ball-receiving section to enter the ball-entering section does not pay out the game ball (give a privilege) when the game ball enters the ball-entering section. may be

(22) In the above-described fourth embodiment, two types of open states, that is, the open state A and the open state B, are provided.

(23) In the fourth embodiment, the open state B may be more advantageous than the open state A (the first winning opening 403 is more advantageous than the second winning opening 404). The open state on the side where the amount of movement of the member 431 is large can be made more advantageous.

(24) In the modified examples 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment, during the period until the variable winning device 401 switches from the open state A to the open state B, the first winning opening section 403 and the second winning opening section 404 may be in the open state, and the period in the open state A and the period in the open state B may overlap. In this case, compared to the case where the open state A is simply switched to the open state B, the winning mode of the game balls to the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 can be complicated, Improves interest. It should be noted that this also applies to the case where the variable winning device 401 switches from the open state B to the open state A. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which both the first winning opening portion 403 and the second winning opening portion 404 are opened in a period other than the overlapping period.

(25) In the fourth embodiment, when switching from the closed state to the open state A is started and when switching from the closed state to the open state B is started, a predetermined notification is made, The predetermined notification may be configured so as not to suggest or clarify which of the open states A and B will be. In this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable winning device 401 and enjoy the game of predicting which open state it will be.

(26) In the fourth embodiment, the main controller 81 controls the variable winning driving section 419, and the variable winning driving section 419 drives the opening/closing member 431. However, the variable winning driving section 419 is omitted. Alternatively, the opening/closing member 431 may be rotated by the weight of the game ball that contacts the opening/closing member 431 .

(27) In the fourth embodiment, the opening/closing member 431 is configured to rotate, but may be configured to move linearly. As such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. An opening/closing member 855 is arranged so as to be able to cover the 854 from above, and is configured to be capable of reciprocating in the direction in which the entering ball portions 853 and 854 are arranged. A configuration such as switching the entering ball portion to be in a state is conceivable.

(28) In the sixth embodiment, two types of closed states, that is, the closed state A and the closed state B, are provided.

(29) In the sixth embodiment, the movable plate 651 moves mechanically in conjunction with the movement of the opening/closing member 631. It may be configured to be driven and controlled separately from the member 631 . In this case, the movable plate driving means may be controlled so as to operate the movable plate 651 in accordance with the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode and the end timing of the round game (the start timing of the waiting period between rounds). In this case, the control of the movable plate driving means is preferably performed by the main controller 81 because the cooperation (synchronization) with the control of the opening/closing member 631 is simplified.

(30) In the seventh embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the opening and closing execution mode is different, so that the second special figure is more advantageous than the first special figure. Alternatively or in addition, whether or not the support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode, or by providing a difference in the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode continues, etc., causes a difference in the degree of advantage. may be configured.

(31) In the above seventh embodiment, the number of prize balls when the game balls enter the third working port 803 is the same number as when the lower working port 34 wins. The number of prize balls when a prize is awarded to the 803 is arbitrary, and may be larger than when a prize is awarded to the lower working opening 34 . In this case, in addition to enhancing the special feeling of the third operation port 803, more game balls that can be obtained in the opening/closing execution mode can be piled up, which leads to improving the attractiveness of the opening/closing execution mode. Also, the number of prize balls when the game balls enter the third operation port 803 may be made smaller than when the game balls enter the lower operation port 34, or the game balls may not be paid out. In this case, it is possible to prevent the total number of prize balls that can be obtained in the open/close execution mode from becoming excessively large, and to avoid becoming too advantageous to the player. In any case, in order to ensure the superiority of the variable prize winning device 802, it is preferable to reduce the number of prize balls (15 in this embodiment) when the variable prize winning device 802 wins. .

(32) In the first embodiment, the left channel forming portion 131 and the right channel forming portion 161 may be configured as shown in FIG. (a) of FIG. 57 is a front view showing a modification of the flow path forming portions 131 and 161, and (b) is a plan view of (a). Since the right flow path forming portion 161 and the left flow path forming portion 131 have a symmetrical configuration, the left flow path forming portion 131 will be described as an example here.

The left flow path forming portion 131 is made of a transparent synthetic resin as in the first embodiment, and the second vertical wall portion 138 (the side surface of the left flow path forming portion 131) has a , the out port 141 is open. As shown in FIG. 57(b), the out port 141 includes an opening 141a that opens in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine (to the right, in the direction of arrow C), and a game ball that enters the opening 141a in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine ( and a guide passage portion 141b that guides the player to the left side) and then to the rear of the gaming machine. A portion of the guide passage portion 141b that guides the game ball in the horizontal direction of the game machine has a length of at least one game ball.

In this modified example, the second vertical wall portion 138 is inclined in plan view. Specifically, the second vertical wall portion 138 obliquely intersects the opening direction so that the front end portion 138a of the second vertical wall portion 138 is located on the opening direction side (right side) of the opening portion 141a relative to the rear end portion 138b. . Therefore, the opening 141 a (opening surface) of the out port 141 is also inclined along the second vertical wall portion 138 .

For example, as in the first embodiment, if the second vertical wall portion 138 extends in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 24), the front view from the front of the game machine Although the opening of the out port 141 can be made difficult to see, the opening may be easily seen when looking obliquely. In this respect, according to this modification, the opening 141a is inclined, so that even when looking obliquely from the front of the gaming machine, the opening 141a becomes difficult to see, and the visibility of the out port 141 is further improved. can be lowered.

In addition, in this modification, of the front surface portion 131a of the left flow path forming portion 131, at least a region 131b (see FIG. 58A) located in front of the opening 141a in a front view from the front of the gaming machine and a guide A region 131c located in front of the passage portion 141b is colored with a predetermined decoration such as plating or sealing. On the other hand, the second inclined portion 136, which serves as the rolling surface of the game ball, does not have such coloring, and the light transmittance of the regions 131b and 131c is lower than that of the second inclined portion 136. As a result, the opening 141a and the guide passage 141b are prevented from being seen through the front surface 131a, and the outlet 141 is less noticeable.

Instead of coloring the regions 131b and 131c, the regions 131b and 131c are made of an opaque material or a material having a lower light transmittance than the second inclined portion 136, thereby improving the visibility of the outlet 141. It is good also as a structure which lowers. Alternatively, only one of the regions 131b and 131c may be colored or made of an opaque material. Even in this case, the out port 141 can be made less conspicuous than when both of the regions 131b and 131c have high light transmittance.

Furthermore, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 57(b), a projecting portion 951 is integrally formed at the end portion of the front portion 131a of the left flow path forming portion 131 on the shutter 216 side. The protruding portion 951 is positioned in front of the gaming machine from the opening 141a of the out port 141, and protrudes toward the shutter 216 from the second inclined portion 136 (opening 141a). Like the regions 131b and 131c, the front surface of the protruding portion 951 is colored (decorated) or made of an opaque material so that it is difficult or impermeable to see through. Therefore, the projection 951 blocks the opening 141a not only when viewed from the front of the game machine but also when viewed obliquely, making it difficult to see the opening 141a. Thereby, the visibility of the out-port 141 is further reduced, and the out-port 141 can be made even less conspicuous.

Note that the projecting portion 951 on the left flow path forming portion 131 side and the projecting portion 951 on the right flow path forming portion 161 side may be continuous in front of the shutter 216 . Further, in the above configuration, the projecting portion 951 is provided after the second vertical wall portion 138 is inclined. However, as shown in FIG. may be provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(c), a configuration may be adopted in which only the second vertical wall portion 138 is inclined and the projecting portion 951 is not provided.

The above configuration shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 can be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to the second to seventh embodiments.

(33) As shown in FIG. 59, a configuration in which a variable winning device 901 that opens and closes the big winning opening 902 by means of an opening/closing member 911 provided with a ball receiving portion 912 is arranged above the lower operating opening 34 and the electric accessory 34a. may be In this case, in a situation where the variable winning device 901 is in the open state or the closed state, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can or easily wins a prize in the lower operation opening 34 from the side. When the accessory 34a is in the closed state, it becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the lower operation opening 34 (FIG. 57(a)). By dropping the game ball from the ball receiving portion 912, it may be possible to enter the lower operation opening 34 from above (FIG. 57(b)). According to the above configuration, depending on the state of the variable prize winning device 901, it is possible to change not only the likelihood of winning a prize to the lower working port 34 but also the winning mode of the game ball to the lower working port 34. As a result, the variety of games is increased and the interest is improved.

(34) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when a ball enters and results in a big win, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, a mahjong ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the pachinko machine and the slot machine are provided with a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated to start rotation of the reels. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

It should be noted that the invention described in each of the following features is "a game machine such as a pachinko machine, based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry means or a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a game ball. (See, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175).”, “Here, in gaming machines, it is desirable to devise ways to increase attention to games. This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first state (open state) provided in the game area in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. ), variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 201, 301, 401, 502, 802) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means (main control means) for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on a predetermined specific trigger A function of executing the big winning opening opening and closing process by the device 81);
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Among the game balls flowing down the game area, other ball entering portions (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34, general winning ports 31a to 31d) on the upstream side of the variable ball entering means did not enter Lead-out means (left flow path formation part 131 second inclined portion 136, right channel forming portion 161 second inclined portion 166, game ball guide structure in areas PE4a to PE4c);
A discharge portion (out ports 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
with
When the variable ball entering means is in the first state, the game ball drawn to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entering means, and when the variable ball entering means is in the second state , a game machine characterized in that it is constructed so that a game ball drawn out to the predetermined area can enter the discharge section.

When variable ball entry control is performed, it is desirable for a player to achieve efficient ball entry to the variable ball entry means and to suppress wasteful consumption of game balls. In this regard, in the above configuration, among the game balls flowing down the game area, all or substantially all of the game balls that did not enter the other ball entering portion on the upstream side of the variable ball entering means are treated as other entering balls. In addition, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, the game ball drawn to the prescribed area can enter the variable ball entry means. It has a configuration. In this case, when the player sees the flow of the game balls gathering in the predetermined area and the variable ball entering means is switched to the first state, it is likely that the variable ball entering means can efficiently enter the game balls. It is possible to make an impression.

In addition, regardless of the shooting force of the game balls from the shooting means, the flow of the game balls gathering in the predetermined area can be changed into a special game state by adopting the configuration in which the game balls are led to the predetermined area as described above. It can occur on a daily basis. That is, when the player constantly sees the above flow, it is possible to promote awareness that the game ball can be efficiently entered into the variable ball entering means, and to increase the enjoyment of generating the variable ball entering control.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game ball drawn out to the predetermined area can enter the ejection portion. In this case, in a normal game state in which variable ball entry control is not performed, the game balls collected in the predetermined area can be released outside the game area, and the game balls in the predetermined area progress the game and the variable ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience of hindering the switching operation to the first state.

Feature A2. A game board (game board 24) on which the game area is formed,
The other ball entry part is located upstream from the variable ball entry means, and is configured to guide the entered game ball to the back side of the game board All ball entry parts ( The game machine according to feature A1, characterized by comprising an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, and general winning ports 31a to 31d).

According to the above configuration, except for the case where the game ball enters the ball entering portion other than the variable ball entering means, all or substantially all of the game balls that have been launched can be led out to the predetermined area, and the variable ball entering means It is possible to suitably realize a configuration that allows game balls to enter efficiently.

Feature A3. A pattern display means (pattern display device 41) is installed in the game area so that the game ball can pass through both the left and right sides when viewed from above and from the front, and the pattern is variably displayed,
The derivation means is
A left lead-out means (second inclined portion 136 of the left flow path forming portion 131) capable of leading out the game ball flowing down the left side of the left and right sides to the predetermined area;
A right lead-out means (second inclined portion 166 of the right flow path forming portion 161) capable of leading out the game ball flowing down the right side of the left and right sides to the predetermined area;
with
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the left lead-out means and the right lead-out means are arranged so as to sandwich the predetermined area.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is shot so as to flow down the left side area, the game ball can be led out to the predetermined area by the left leading means, and the game ball is shot so as to flow down the right side area. If so, the game ball can be led out to the predetermined area by the right lead-out means. That is, the game ball can be guided to the predetermined area regardless of which area the game ball flows down, and it is possible to suitably realize a configuration in which the game ball is guided to the predetermined area regardless of the shooting momentum of the game ball. Furthermore, since the predetermined area is located between the left side lead-out means and the right side lead-out means, the game ball can be led out to the predetermined area so as to move toward the center of the game area in the left-right direction. As a result, the flow of game balls gathering in a predetermined area can be constructed at a location that is easily visible to the player, and the effect of feature A1 can be favorably exhibited.

In addition, in the characteristic A3, "arranged so as to sandwich the predetermined area" may be rephrased as "arranged so as to face the predetermined area". In addition, it further has the characteristic that "the left lead-out means and the right lead-out means are configured so that the predetermined area is positioned in the center of the game area in the left-right direction below the pattern display means." good too.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the variable ball entry means is arranged between the left lead-out means and the right lead-out means.

According to the above configuration, even if the player does not actually see the flow of the game balls, the positional relationship between the left lead-out means, the right lead-out means and the variable ball entry means gives the impression that the game balls tend to gather in the variable ball entry means. It is possible to suitably arouse the desire to play.

Feature A5. The other ball entry portion includes a predetermined ball entry portion (general winning openings 31a to 31d),
The privilege granting means is configured to grant a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry section,
A first lead-out portion (the first inclined portion 133 of the left flow path forming portion 131, the right flow path forming portion 161 first inclined portion 163),
The lead-out means is a second lead-out part (left flow path formation The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized by comprising a second inclined portion 136 of the portion 131 and a second inclined portion 166 of the right flow path forming portion 161).

For example, if a game ball enters the variable ball entering means too efficiently, the processing load inside the gaming machine for entering a ball increases, which may hinder the operation of the gaming machine. In this respect, in the present configuration, the first lead-out portion once leads the game ball toward the predetermined ball-entering portion, and the second lead-out portion guides the game ball that did not enter the predetermined ball-entering portion to the predetermined area. It is configured. In this case, it is possible to reduce the frequency of game balls entering the variable ball entering means by increasing the chances of the game balls entering the predetermined ball entering portion, thereby reducing the processing load. . At that time, since the privilege is given based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry part, as a result of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry part, the ball may not enter the variable ball entry means. However, the player can obtain the privilege. For this reason, for example, compared to the case where the game balls heading for the variable ball entry means are thinned out by guiding the game balls to the discharge part, etc., it becomes easier to obtain the understanding of the players, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the desire to play. Become.

Feature A6. Described in feature A5, characterized in that when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering portion, the player is less advantageous than when the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the fact that it is more advantageous for the player to enter the ball into the predetermined ball entry section than to enter the ball into the variable ball entry means, and enjoy the pleasure of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible to secure it appropriately.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A5 or A6, wherein the predetermined ball-entering unit has a configuration in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the variable ball-entering means in the first state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive thinning of the game balls heading for the variable ball-entering means by the predetermined ball-entering section, and to appropriately secure the opportunity to enjoy the ball entering the variable ball-entering means. Become.

Note that the feature A7 is "characterized in that the size of the opening of the predetermined ball-entering portion is smaller than the size of the opening of the variable ball-entering means in the first state," The degree of opening of the ball portion is smaller than the degree of opening of the variable ball entry means in the first state."

Feature A8. The lead-out means has a flat portion (upper surfaces of the second inclined portions 136, 166) which is shaped like a passage extending along the lead-out direction of the game ball and on which the game ball can roll. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that it has a configuration that can be drawn out to the area.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to smoothly draw out the game ball toward the predetermined area as compared with the case where the lead-out means is constituted by the game nail. In addition, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the game ball is not properly led out to the predetermined area due to the so-called nail bending, which is a preferable mode in terms of securing the fairness of the game.

Feature A9. It is characterized in that when the variable ball entering means is in the first state, all or substantially all of the game balls drawn to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A8.

According to the above configuration, the game ball can enter the variable ball entering means more efficiently. In addition, such ball entry can be realized regardless of the momentum of the game ball, and the efficiency of ball entry into the variable ball entry means can be enhanced regardless of the skill of the player.

Feature A10. The variable ball entry means forms a predetermined receiving area (receiving area RA) in the game area when the state is switched from the second state to the first state, and a game ball that has flowed into the predetermined receiving area. is configured to accept
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the predetermined area is included in an area in which the predetermined receiving area is formed.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined area from which the game ball is drawn out by the drawing-out means is included in the area in which the predetermined receiving area is formed. A game ball is drawn into the receiving area. Therefore, all or substantially all of the game balls drawn to the predetermined area at the timing when the variable ball entering means is in the first state can be entered into the variable ball entering means, thereby achieving more efficient ball entering. becomes possible.

Feature A11. The variable ball entry means includes a shutter (shutter 216) that can be displaced between a predetermined first position (retracted position) and a second position (projection position) projecting forward of the game machine from the first position, The first state is established when the shutter is at the first position, and the second state is established when the shutter is at the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, when the shutter is at the first position, the game ball drawn to the predetermined area passes in front of the shutter and can enter the variable ball entering means, while the shutter is at the second position. In the case of (1), after the game ball moves (rolls) on the shutter, it can enter the discharge section, and it is a practically preferable aspect in distributing the game ball to the variable ball entry means and the discharge section. be able to.

Feature A12. When the shutter is at least at the second position, the game ball can move on the shutter toward the side of the shutter,
The game machine according to feature A11, wherein the discharge section is arranged on the side of the shutter.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to guide the game ball to the discharge section by utilizing the flow of the game ball on the shutter, and it is possible to utilize the shutter as a game ball passage to the discharge section. As a result, it is possible to cover the discharge of the game ball to the discharge part and the switching of the ease of entry of the game ball to the variable ball entry means with a single member, and it is possible to reduce the number of parts. .

Feature A13. The game machine according to feature A12, wherein the distance between the shutter and the ejection part is less than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the above configuration, game balls are prevented from falling downward from between the shutter and the discharge section, and a separate lead-out path for guiding the game balls from the shutter to the discharge section can be made unnecessary. As a result, the configuration for guiding the game balls to the discharge section becomes simple, and the configuration can be optimized for a gaming machine with a limited game area.

Feature A14. The game machine according to feature A12 or A13, wherein the discharge section opens toward the shutter.

According to the above configuration, the force of the game ball moving on the shutter can be utilized to allow the ball to smoothly enter the discharge section, and the stagnation of the flow of the game ball on the shutter can be suppressed. In addition, since the game ball can enter the discharge section as it is without changing the moving direction, the game ball passage from the shutter to the discharge section can be simplified.

Feature A15. Any of the features A12 to A14, wherein the shutter includes a guide portion (first shutter slant portion 217, second shutter slant portion 218) capable of guiding game balls on the shutter to the ejection portion. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to smoothly guide the game ball on the shutter to the discharging part, and to suppress the flow of the game ball from being stagnated on the shutter.

It should be noted that the present feature is that "the shutter has inclined portions (first shutter inclined portion 217, second shutter inclined portion 218) that slope downward toward the ejection portion, and the inclined portion moves the game ball to the ejection portion. It is characterized by being configured to be able to guide to".

Feature A16. When the shutter is at least at the second position, the game ball can move on the shutter,
The game machine according to any one of features A11 to A14, further comprising a deceleration means (projection portion 215) capable of decelerating a game ball moving on the shutter.

According to the above configuration, the stay period of the game ball on the shutter can be lengthened as compared with the case without the deceleration means. As a result, the probability that the shutter is switched from the second position to the first position before the game ball crosses over the shutter is increased, and the probability that the game ball on the shutter enters the variable ball entry means can be increased. . In other words, even a game ball that reaches the predetermined area under the condition that the shutter is at the second position can be expected to enter the variable ball entry means, and more efficient ball entry into the variable ball entry means is achieved. be.

Feature A17. The variable ball entry means has an opening/closing body (opening/closing door 305) that can be displaced between a predetermined first position (retracted position) and a second position (protruding position) projecting forward of the gaming machine from the first position. prepared,
The opening/closing body can be displaced to the second position by rotating from the first position to the front of the game machine,
The variable ball entering means is configured to be in the second state when the opening/closing body is in the first position, and to be in the first state when the opening/closing body is in the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the opening/closing body is at the first position, the game ball drawn to the predetermined area can pass through the front of the opening/closing body and enter the discharge section, while the opening/closing body is at the second position. When it is in the position, the game ball can be picked up by the opening/closing body and can be entered into the variable ball entering means, and the game ball can be distributed to the variable ball entering means and the discharging part in a practically preferable mode. can.

Feature A18. A game ball can flow down in front of the opening and closing body at the first position,
The game machine according to feature A17, wherein the discharge section is arranged below the opening/closing body.

According to the above configuration, since the discharge section is positioned below the opening/closing body, game balls passing in front of the opening/closing body at the first position can be naturally guided to the discharge section. As a result, it is possible to guide the game ball that has reached the predetermined area under the condition that the variable ball entering means is in the second state to the discharge part with a relatively simple configuration.

In addition, in this feature, "the front side of the opening/closing body" may be replaced with "the front side of the opening/closing body when viewed from the front of the game machine". Similarly, in each of the following features, the term “front” can be appropriately rephrased as “the front side in a front view from the front of the game machine”.

Feature A19. a first discharge section as the discharge section;
A second discharge portion (out ports 141, 171) arranged on the side of the opening/closing body and capable of discharging the game ball from the game area;
The gaming machine according to feature A18, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the opening/closing body is in the second position, the game ball spilled from the opening/closing body can be discharged from the game area through the second discharge part, and the game ball can be discharged by the variable ball entry means and its peripheral portion. It becomes possible to suppress the flow of stagnation.

Feature A20. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first state (open state) provided in the game area in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. ), variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 201, 301, 401, 502, 802) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means (main control means) for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on a predetermined specific trigger A function of executing the big winning opening opening and closing process by the device 81);
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Among the game balls flowing down the game area, other ball entering portions (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34, general winning ports 31a to 31d) on the upstream side of the variable ball entering means did not enter Leading-out means (the second inclined portion 136 of the left channel forming portion 131, the right channel forming portion 161 second inclined portion 166, game ball guide structure in areas PE4a to PE4c);
A discharge portion (out ports 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
with
When the variable ball entering means is in the first state, the game ball drawn to the predetermined area can enter the variable ball entering means, and when the variable ball entering means is in the second state , a game machine characterized in that it is constructed so that a game ball drawn out to the predetermined area can enter the discharge section.

In the above configuration, among the game balls flowing down the game area, all or substantially all of the game balls that did not enter the other ball entering section on the upstream side of the variable ball entering means A configuration is adopted in which the ball is led out to a predetermined region on the downstream side, and in addition, when the variable ball entering means is in the first state, the game ball led out to the predetermined region can be entered into the variable ball entering means. It's becoming In this case, when the player sees the flow of game balls gathering in the predetermined area, and the variable ball entry means is switched to the first state, the game ball can be efficiently entered into the variable ball entry means. It is possible to give such an impression. Further, in this configuration, when the variable ball entering means is in the second state, the game ball drawn out to the predetermined area can enter the discharge portion. In this case, in a normal game state in which variable ball entry control is not performed, the game balls collected in the predetermined area can be released outside the game area, and the game balls in the predetermined area progress the game and the variable ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience of hindering the switching operation to the first state.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features A1 to A19 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the features A1 to A20, any one of the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of (1) individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first state (open state) provided in the game area in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state. ), and variable ball entry means (variable winning device 301) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means (main control means) for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state based on a predetermined specific trigger A function of executing the big winning opening opening and closing process by the device 81);
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A first discharge portion (out ports 141, 171) and a second discharge portion (lower out port 321) provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
with
When the variable ball entering means is in the second state, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ejection part than the first ejection part, and when the variable ball entering means is in the first state 2. A gaming machine characterized in that it is constructed such that a game ball is more likely to enter the first discharge section than the second discharge section.

In the above configuration, when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ejection section than the first ejection section. The balls are easily ejected through the second ejector. In a game, the period in which variable ball entry control is not performed is longer than the period in which variable ball entry control is performed and tends to be dominant, so the player routinely sees how game balls are ejected through the second ejection part. Therefore, the second discharge part is a game ball discharge port, and a game ball entering the second discharge part becomes a discharge ball (out ball). On top of that, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, it is configured such that the game ball is more likely to be discharged through the first discharge section, not the second discharge section. Due to the preconceived notion that the second ejection part is the ejection port, the player is prevented from recognizing that the game ball is ejected even if the game ball enters the first ejection part. Therefore, it is possible to eject game balls that have not entered the variable ball entering means in the second state while making the ejection inconspicuous. As a result, it is possible to adjust the degree of entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means while suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play.

Feature B2. A game ball can enter the first discharge portion and cannot enter the second discharge portion when the variable ball entering means is in the first state. The gaming machine described in B1.

According to the above configuration, when the variable ball-entering means is in the first state, the game ball is not discharged through the second discharge part. It is possible to adjust the degree of ball entry of the game ball to.

Feature B3. A game ball can enter the second discharge section and cannot enter the first discharge section when the variable ball entering means is in the second state. The gaming machine according to B1 or B2.

According to the above configuration, when the variable ball entering means is in the second state, the presence of the second ejection portion can be emphasized, and the game ball is ejected from the game area by entering the second ejection portion. It is possible to further promote the recognition that it is done. This makes it possible to make the game ball discharged through the first discharge part less conspicuous, thereby enhancing the effect of the feature B1.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the first ejection section is lower in visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the second ejection section.

According to the above configuration, the presence of the first ejection section is diluted compared to the second ejection section, and an increase in the player's attention to the first ejection section is suppressed. As a result, the ejection of the game ball through the first ejection portion becomes even less conspicuous, and the effect of feature B1 can be enhanced.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the second ejection section opens in front of the gaming machine, and the first ejection section opens in a direction different from the front of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a practically preferable aspect in realizing the configuration of the feature B4. That is, by increasing the visibility of the second ejection section from the front of the gaming machine, the presence of the second ejection section can be favorably appealed to the player. visibility can be reduced, and it becomes possible to make it inconspicuous.

In addition, in this feature, "a game board (game board 24) having the game area formed on its front surface" is provided, and "a direction different from the front of the game machine" is defined as "a direction along the front surface of the game board". ' or 'the direction parallel to the front surface of the game board'.

Feature B6. Each discharge part has an opening through which a game ball can pass,
The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the opening of the first ejection section is smaller than the opening of the second ejection section.

According to the above configuration, the opening of the first ejection section can be made less conspicuous than the opening of the second ejection section, and the player can hardly notice the existence of the first ejection section. Even if the player notices the presence of the first discharge part, the smaller opening prevents the player from having the impression that the game ball is likely to enter. As a result, it is possible to reduce the anxiety of the player who cares about the presence of the first discharge section, and to appropriately suppress the decline in the player's desire to play.

In addition, in this feature, the “opening portion” may be replaced with the “opening width”. In addition, in this feature, "each discharge part is an opening through which a game ball can pass" may be replaced with "each discharge part is an opening through which a game ball flowing down the game area can pass".

Feature B7. Characteristic B6, characterized in that a plurality of game balls can pass through the opening of the second discharge part, and one game ball can pass through the opening of the first discharge part. game machine.

In the above configuration, since a plurality of game balls can enter the second discharge part at the same time, in a normal game state in which variable ball entry control is not performed, the game balls in the game area can be smoothly moved. It is possible to suppress the stagnation of game balls in the game area. On the other hand, the opening of the first ejection part is kept to the minimum size necessary for receiving the game ball, thereby making the ejection of the game ball inconspicuous and preventing the game ball from entering the variable ball entry means. can be discharged as appropriate.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the first discharge section is arranged upstream of the second discharge section.

In a game machine, the discharge section is often arranged at the bottom (lowest stream) of the game area, and it is assumed that there are many cases where the player plays with such a prejudice. This feature utilizes this, and arranges the first ejection part that functions when the variable ball entry means is in the first state upstream of the second ejection part that functions in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the first ejection portion as an ejection port at a glance and thereby reducing his/her willingness to play.

Feature B9. The variable ball entry means
A predetermined ball entry section (large winning opening 302),
an opening/closing body (opening/closing door 305) capable of opening/closing the predetermined ball entry portion;
with
The opening/closing body can be displaced to a second position (projection position) projecting forward of the game machine from the first position by rotating from a predetermined first position (retraction position) toward the front of the game machine. cage,
The variable ball entering means is configured to be in the second state when the opening/closing body is in the first position, and to be in the first state when the opening/closing body is in the second position,
A game ball can flow down in front of the opening and closing body at the first position,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the first discharge section is arranged on the side of the opening/closing body.

In the above configuration, when the opening/closing body is at the second position, the game ball received by the opening/closing body moves along the opening/closing body, thereby guiding the game ball toward the first discharge section. When the opening/closing body is in the first position, the game ball passes in front of the opening/closing body so that the opening/closing body does not guide the game ball toward the first discharge section. That is, the game balls can be distributed to the first ejection section and the second ejection section along with the execution of the variable ball entry control, and the configuration of the feature B1 can be realized with a relatively simple configuration. .

Feature B10. The game machine according to feature B9, wherein the first ejection part is arranged adjacent to the opening/closing body.

According to the above configuration, since the first discharge portion and the opening/closing body are adjacent to each other, when the opening/closing body is in the second position, when the game ball moving on the opening/closing body passes through the opening/closing body, A game ball can be quickly entered into the first discharge part. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the flow of the game ball from passing through the opening/closing body to the first discharge part, and the entry of the game ball into the first discharge part becomes even less conspicuous. Further, by arranging the first ejection part and the opening/closing body adjacent to each other, the distance between the first ejection part and the predetermined ball-entering part can be shortened. As a result, the ball can be entered into the first ejection portion while appearing as if the ball is entering the predetermined ball entrance portion, and the ejection can be made less conspicuous.

In addition, in this feature, "arranged adjacent to the opening/closing body" may be rephrased as "arranged adjacent to the opening/closing body in a front view from the front of the game machine".

Feature B11. The game machine according to feature B9 or B10, wherein the distance between the first discharge part and the opening/closing body is less than the diameter of a game ball.

For example, if the game ball falls from between the first discharge part and the opening/closing body, the player will be more likely to have an impression that the game ball is likely to fall as a result of seeing the game ball falling from the opening/closing body. There is a risk. In this regard, in this configuration, since the game balls are prevented from falling from between the first discharge part and the opening/closing body, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have the impression that the game balls are likely to spill out, thereby increasing the motivation to play the game. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the decrease in

Feature B12. The opening/closing body has a ball receiving portion (rear surface portion 305c of the opening/closing door 305) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the game area when the opening/closing body is in the second position,
Any of the characteristics B9 to B11, characterized in that an inhibition means (protrusion 325) capable of inhibiting the flow of game balls on the ball receiving part toward the first ejection part is provided. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, for example, by adjusting the degree of inhibition by the inhibition means at the time of designing the game machine, it is possible to adjust the ease with which the game ball enters the first discharge section, and furthermore, It is possible to adjust the ease with which a game ball enters the variable ball entering means (predetermined ball entering portion).

In addition, in this feature, the ``obstructing means capable of inhibiting the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving portion toward the first discharging portion'' is replaced with ``the first ball on the ball receiving portion. Adjusting means for adjusting the ease of movement to the discharge part side" and "distribution means for distributing game balls on the ball receiving part to the first discharge part side and the predetermined ball entry part side" In other words,

Feature B13. The game machine according to any one of features B9 to B12, wherein the second discharge section is arranged below the opening/closing body.

According to the above configuration, since the second ejection part is positioned below the opening/closing body, game balls passing in front of the opening/closing body at the first position can be naturally guided to the second ejection part. As a result, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the game ball easily enters the second ejection portion when the variable ball entering means is in the second state, with a relatively simple configuration.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B13, any of features A1 to A20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D14, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of (1) individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (first winning opening portion 403) and a second ball entering portion (second winning opening portion 404) which are provided in the game area and into which game balls can enter;
A first state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter into the first ball entering portion, and a game ball can enter into the first ball entering portion or enter a ball more than the first state. a movable body (opening/closing member 431) that can be switched to a second state (open state) that is easy to move;
Based on a predetermined opportunity, the movable body is changed from the first state to the second state, and then switching control means for executing switching control to the first state (main controller 81 opening and closing the large winning opening) function to perform processing) and
privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of imparting a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into each of the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion;
with
A ball receiving portion (second opening/closing plate 433) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the game area in a state where the movable body is at least in the first state is provided,
The game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second ball entering portion when the movable body switches from the first state to the second state. Amusement machine.

When switching control is performed, it is desirable for the player to achieve efficient ball entry into the first ball entry section and to suppress wasteful consumption of game balls. For this reason, some players may perform a so-called stop shot, such as refraining from shooting a game ball at a timing when it is difficult for a ball to enter the first ball entering portion. However, if such technical intervention is performed excessively, the fairness of the game is impaired, which is not desirable.

In this regard, in the above configuration, in the first state in which the first ball entering portion is in the first state where the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter, the ball receiving portion capable of receiving the game ball on the game area is provided. The game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second ball entering portion based on switching from the first ball entering portion to the second state where the ball can enter or is easy to enter. there is In this case, even a game ball launched at a timing when it is difficult for a ball to enter the first ball-entering portion can enter the second ball-entering portion via the ball receiving portion. As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently obtain benefits while suppressing the occurrence of wasted balls, and the configuration can be made to meet the needs of the player. Not only that, it is also possible to suppress rampant stopping shots, which is advantageous in ensuring fairness of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second ball entering portion instead of the first ball entering portion. For example, if the configuration is such that a game ball received by the ball receiving portion enters the first ball entering portion, the ball enters due to the movable body being in the first state (not through the ball receiving portion). Since the destination of the game ball is the same as in the case where the ball is entered by ), it may be difficult to identify which route the ball was entered in the gaming machine. In this regard, in this configuration, the destination of the game ball is different depending on whether the ball is entered via the ball receiving portion or not. can be easily identified. For this reason, it is easy to differentiate between the former case and the latter case, for example, by providing a difference in the degree of advantage. can be Further, for example, in a configuration in which a game ball received by a ball receiving portion is entered into a first ball entering portion (a ball entering portion that is opened and closed by a movable body), a game ball that travels to the first ball entering portion through the ball receiving portion, There is a concern that the game balls that go directly to the first ball entry part without going through the ball receiving part interfere with each other, and that the entry of each ball is hindered. In this regard, in the present configuration, the ball-entering portion through which the ball-receiving portion is intervened and the ball-entering portion which is not intervened are separated, so that the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the gaming machine is configured not to allow a game ball to enter the second ball entering portion when the movable body is in the first state.

According to the above configuration, game balls are placed (or accumulated) on the movable body while the movable body is in the first state, and released toward the second ball-entering portion when switching to the second state. can be established, and it is possible to provide novel game characteristics that have never existed before. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player and suitably increase the desire to play the game.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the gaming machine is configured not to allow a game ball to enter the second ball entering portion when the movable body is in the second state.

According to the above configuration, when the ball is in the second state where it is possible or easy to enter the first ball-entering portion, the ball does not enter the second ball-entering portion. It is possible to concentrate on whether or not the ball enters the first ball-entering part without worrying about the ball-entering part. In other words, it is possible to add a new game in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entering portion while suppressing the effect on the original game of the switching control that switches the movable body between the first state and the second state. be possible. Note that when this feature is applied to feature C2, the opportunity for a game ball to enter the second ball entry section can be limited to when switching from the first state to the second state. It is advantageous in increasing the joy and surprise when a ball is entered.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the game ball is allowed to enter the second ball entering portion when the movable body is in the second state.

According to the above configuration, when the movable body is in the second state, it is possible to enjoy whether or not the game ball enters not only the first ball entering portion but also the second ball entering portion. In other words, it is possible to add fun to which ball entry part the game ball enters, and to improve interest compared to a uniform game that only determines whether the game ball enters one ball entry part. It becomes possible to let

Feature C5. When the movable body switches from the first state to the second state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion is dropped downward,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the dropped game ball can enter the second ball entering section.

According to the above configuration, by switching from the first state to the second state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion enters the second ball entering portion, and the ball receiving state in the ball receiving portion is reset. can be planned. As a result, when the movable body is returned to the first state, it is possible to start receiving a new ball in a state in which no game ball remains on the ball receiving portion.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the second ball-entering portion is arranged below the ball-receiving portion and opens upward.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball that has fallen from the ball receiving portion to enter the second ball entering portion. Moreover, the passage of the game ball from the ball receiving portion to the second ball entering portion can be simplified, and the area occupied by the passage in the game area can be reduced compared to the case where the passage is complicated. Become. That is, it is possible to provide an optimum configuration for a game machine with a limited game area.

Feature C7. Characteristic C5 characterized in that the movable body is rotatable in a predetermined direction (game front-rear direction), and is configured to switch from the first state to the second state by the rotation. Or the gaming machine described in C6.

According to the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can be dropped by utilizing the rotation of the movable body, and the configuration of feature C5 or C6 can be realized with a relatively simple configuration. Become.

Feature C8. The movable body includes an opening/closing portion (first opening/closing plate 432) capable of opening and closing the first ball entering portion,
Characteristic C7, characterized in that, when the first ball-entering portion is brought into the first state by the opening/closing portion, the ball receiving portion protrudes forward of the game machine more than the opening/closing portion. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to receive a game ball in the ball receiving portion while restricting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering portion by the opening/closing portion. As a result, for example, it is possible to suitably suppress the inconvenience of the game ball rebounding due to contact with the ball receiving portion and entering the first ball entering portion despite being in the first state.

Feature C9. The movable body is configured to be switched from the first state to the second state by the rotation toward the front of the gaming machine,
A predetermined game part (window panel 62) is arranged in front of the movable body and separated from the movable body,
The movable body includes an opening/closing portion (first opening/closing plate 432) capable of opening and closing the first ball-entering portion, and when the first ball-entering portion is in the second state by the opening/closing portion, the The gaming machine according to feature C7 or C8, wherein the distance (distance D2) between the end of the opening/closing part on the side of the game component and the game component is less than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the above configuration, when the first ball-entering portion is in the second state by the opening/closing portion, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing in front of the opening/closing portion and moving below the movable body. In other words, in the second state where the ball can be entered into the first ball-entering section or is likely to enter the ball, the ball is not entered into the second ball-entering section. It is possible to concentrate on whether or not the ball enters the first ball entering portion without doing so. In other words, it is possible to add a new game in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entering portion while suppressing the effect on the original game of the switching control that switches the movable body between the first state and the second state. be possible.

Feature C10. The movable body is configured to be switched from the first state to the second state by the rotation toward the front of the gaming machine,
A predetermined game part (window panel 62) is arranged in front of the movable body and separated from the movable body,
The movable body includes an opening/closing portion (first opening/closing plate 432) capable of opening and closing the first ball-entering portion, and when the first ball-entering portion is in the second state by the opening/closing portion, the The gaming machine according to feature C7 or C8, wherein the distance (distance D2) between the end of the opening/closing portion on the side of the game component and the game component is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the above configuration, when the first ball-entering portion is in the second state by the opening/closing portion, the game ball can pass in front of the opening/closing portion and move below the movable body. That is, in the second state where the ball can enter the first ball entering portion or is likely to enter the ball, the ball can enter the second ball entering portion. It is possible to add the fun of whether the ball will enter the ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement compared to a uniform game in which only whether or not a game ball enters one ball entry portion.

Feature C11. A discharge portion (out ports 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
Characteristic features C1 to C10, characterized in that it has a lead-out means (upper surface part 433b of the second opening and closing plate 433) capable of leading out the game ball received by the ball receiving part to the discharge part side. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, when the switching control is not executed and the movable body is normalized in the first state, that is, when the ball receiving portion continues to be in the ball receiving state for a long period of time, the ball receiving portion receives the ball. A game ball can be guided to the discharge section and discharged from the game area as appropriate. As a result, game balls are prevented from staying on the ball receiving portion, and ball clogging in the ball receiving portion and its peripheral area is suppressed. For example, if ball jams occur frequently in these areas, the chances of getting jammed balls to be cleared by the staff of the playground increase, which makes the players feel annoyed, or creates a flow of game balls contrary to the design intent. Although there is concern about inconvenience, according to this configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature C12. The lead-out means is capable of leading out the game ball received by the ball receiving portion toward the side of the ball receiving portion,
The game machine according to feature C11, wherein the ejection part is arranged adjacent to the ball receiving part on the side of the ball receiving part.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to facilitate the lead-out of the game ball from the ball receiving portion to the discharging portion. In addition, since the distance between the ball receiving part and the discharging part becomes closer, whether the game ball remains on the ball receiving part or whether it has already entered the discharging part can be visually confirmed without moving the line of sight. This makes it possible to consolidate the points of interest. As a result, distraction of attention is suppressed compared to the case where it is necessary to visually recognize various locations, and the player can easily concentrate on the game.

Feature C13. The gaming machine according to feature C12, wherein the ejection portion opens toward the ball receiving portion.

According to the above configuration, the force of the game ball moving on the ball receiving part can be used to smoothly enter the discharge part, and it is possible to suppress the stagnation of the flow of the game ball on the ball receiving part. become. In addition, since the game ball can enter the discharge section as it is without changing the movement direction, the structure for leading out the game ball to the discharge section can be simplified.

Feature C14. When the movable body is in the first state, the game ball can move on the ball receiving portion,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, further comprising decelerating means (protruding portion 215) capable of decelerating the game ball moving on the ball receiving portion.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to lengthen the stay period of the game ball on the ball receiving portion as compared with the case where there is no deceleration means, and change the state from the first state to the second state before the game ball passes through the ball receiving portion. can increase the probability that a switch to As a result, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can be easily entered into the second ball entering portion, and the desire to play can be suitably aroused.

Feature C15. Means for differentiating the degree of advantage for the player between when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion and when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion (executing notification effect control processing by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C14, characterized in that it has a function of

According to the above configuration, not only a game in which the game ball is entered into the first ball entering part or the second ball entering part to avoid the discharge of the game ball, but also the first ball entering part and the second ball entering part Values can be differentiated depending on which side the game ball enters. For this reason, which ball entry portion the game ball enters becomes a matter of great interest to the player, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C16. Means for making it more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion than when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion (announcement effect control processing by the effect control device 82) A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C15, characterized in that it has a function of executing

According to the above configuration, when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion, it is more advantageous than when the ball enters the first ball entering portion, so that the ball entering the second ball entering portion is realized. It can increase the happiness of the case. As a result, it is possible to markedly improve interest in which ball entry portion the game ball enters, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C17. The privilege granting means is
a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege (payout of a predetermined number of game balls) to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering portion;
A second privilege (combination of payout of a predetermined number of game balls and an announcement effect, more than a predetermined number) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance portion a second privilege granting means capable of granting a game ball payout);
The gaming machine according to feature C16, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the second ball-entering portion, the second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege that is granted based on the ball entering the first ball-entering portion is granted. Therefore, it is possible to increase the pleasure when the ball enters the second ball-entering portion. As a result, it is possible to markedly improve interest in which ball entry portion the game ball enters, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that applying the configuration of the feature C2 or C3 to the feature C16 or C17 limits the chances of entering the second ball-entering section, which is effective in enhancing the game.

Feature C18. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) that shifts to a special game state in which the switching control can be executed multiple times under a predetermined condition (a jackpot result) is provided. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C17, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion in the waiting period (period of waiting for the start of the next switching control while the first ball entering portion is in the first state) occurring between the switching control before and after. can be entered into the second ball entry section. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of wasted balls in the special game state and efficiently obtaining benefits.

Feature C19. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (first winning opening portion 403) and a second ball entering portion (second winning opening portion 404) which are provided in the game area and into which game balls can enter;
A first state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter into the first ball entering portion, and a game ball can enter into the first ball entering portion or enter a ball more than the first state. a movable body (opening/closing member 431) that can be switched to a second state (open state) that is easy to move;
Based on a predetermined opportunity, the movable body is changed from the first state to the second state, and then switching control means for executing switching control to the first state (main controller 81 opening and closing the large winning opening) function to perform processing) and
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance portion;
with
A ball receiving portion (second opening/closing plate 433) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the game area in a state where the movable body is at least in the first state is provided,
A game machine characterized by being constructed so that a game ball received by said ball receiving portion can enter said second ball entering portion under a predetermined condition.

When switching control is performed, it is desirable for the player to achieve efficient ball entry into the first ball entry section and to suppress wasteful consumption of game balls. For this reason, some players may perform a so-called stop shot, such as refraining from shooting a game ball at a timing when it is difficult for a ball to enter the first ball entering portion. However, if such technical intervention is performed excessively, the fairness of the game is impaired, which is not desirable.

In this regard, in the above configuration, a ball receiving portion capable of receiving a game ball on the game area is provided in the first state in which the first ball entering portion is in a state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter. A game ball received in the second ball entering portion is configured to be able to enter the ball. In this case, even a game ball launched at a timing when it is difficult for a ball to enter the first ball-entering portion can enter the second ball-entering portion via the ball receiving portion. As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently obtain benefits while suppressing the occurrence of wasted balls, and the configuration can be made to meet the needs of the player. Not only that, it is also possible to suppress rampant stopping shots, which is advantageous in securing fairness of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second ball entering portion instead of the first ball entering portion. For example, if the configuration is such that a game ball received by the ball receiving portion enters the first ball entering portion, the ball enters due to the movable body being in the first state (not through the ball receiving portion). Since the destination of the game ball is the same as in the case where the ball is entered by ), it may be difficult to identify which route the ball was entered in the gaming machine. In this regard, in this configuration, the destination of the game ball is different depending on whether the ball is entered via the ball receiving portion or not. can be easily identified. For this reason, it is easy to differentiate between the former case and the latter case, for example, by providing a difference in the degree of advantage. can be Further, for example, in a configuration in which a game ball received by a ball receiving portion is entered into a first ball entering portion (a ball entering portion that is opened and closed by a movable body), a game ball that travels to the first ball entering portion through the ball receiving portion, There is a concern that the game ball that goes directly to the first ball entering portion without going through the ball receiving portion interferes and each ball entering is hindered. The occurrence of such inconvenience is suitably suppressed by separating from the non-ball-entering portion.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features C1 to C18 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the features C1 to C19, any of features A1 to A20, features B1 to B13, features D1 to D14, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of (1) individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section (large winning opening 202, large winning opening 302, second winning opening 404) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
A discharge portion (out ports 141, 171) provided in the game area and capable of discharging game balls from the game area;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the discharge section is configured to open in a horizontal direction of the gaming machine when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

In the above configuration, since the discharge part is configured to open in the horizontal direction of the game machine, it is difficult to visually recognize the opening of the discharge part not only when viewed from the front of the game machine but also when looking down from the front of the game machine. can be done. This makes it possible to discharge the game ball from the game area while making the discharge of the game ball less conspicuous.

Feature D2. a game board (game board 24) having the game area formed on its front surface;
a projecting portion (left channel forming portion 131, right channel forming portion 161) projecting forward of the game machine from the front surface of the game board;
with
The game machine according to feature D1, wherein the discharge part is provided in the projecting part so as to open in the horizontal direction of the game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the discharge portion is formed in front of the front surface of the game board so as to open in the lateral direction of the game machine, the front surface (game area) of the game board can be used while making the discharge portion inconspicuous. It is possible to favorably receive the falling game balls into the ejection portion, and this is a practically preferable mode for realizing the configuration of the feature D1.

Feature D3. The discharge portion is configured to open at the side surface portion (second vertical wall portion 138, 168) of the projecting portion,
Projection means (projection portion 951) which is arranged in the projecting portion in front of the gaming machine from the opening of the discharge portion and projects in the opening direction of the opening from the side portion when viewed from above the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the gaming machine is provided with

In the above configuration, since the projecting means is provided in such a manner that it is arranged in front of the game machine from the opening of the discharge part and projects from the opening in the opening direction, it is possible not only when viewed from the front of the game machine but also obliquely. Even when viewed from above, the opening is blocked by the overhanging means, making it difficult to visually recognize the opening. This further reduces the visibility of the ejection portion, making it possible to make the ejection portion less conspicuous.

Feature D4. The discharge portion is configured to open at the side surface portion (second vertical wall portion 138, 168) of the projecting portion,
The side surface portion is inclined with respect to the opening direction so that the end portion on the front side of the gaming machine is positioned closer to the opening direction side of the opening than the end portion on the back side of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature D2 or D3.

According to the above configuration, since the side surface on which the opening is formed is inclined, it becomes difficult to see the opening not only when viewed from the front of the game machine but also when looking at it obliquely. The visibility of the part can be further reduced.

Feature D5. The projecting portion is provided with a first region (second inclined portion 136) with relatively high light transmittance and a second region with relatively low light transmittance,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, wherein the second area includes at least an area (area 131b) on the gaming machine front side of the opening of the discharge section.

In the above configuration, since the protrusion is provided with the first region having a high light transmittance, for example, by providing the light emitting means behind the protrusion, for example, the first region is brightly illuminated. It is possible to improve the appearance of the protruding portion. However, in this case, the opening of the ejection portion can be seen through the projecting portion, which is not desirable in terms of making the ejection portion inconspicuous. In this regard, in this configuration, a second area having a low light transmittance is provided, and the second area includes at least an area on the gaming machine front side of the opening of the discharge section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opening from being seen through when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and to make the discharge section less conspicuous.

Note that this feature is particularly useful when applied to the above feature D4. That is, in the configuration in which the opening is inclined as in the feature D4, the projected area of the opening when viewed from the front of the gaming machine tends to be large. Therefore, if the opening can be seen through the projecting portion, the opening is easily conspicuous, and the player can easily notice the presence of the ejection portion. By applying this feature to such a configuration, it is possible to make the opening difficult to see, and it is possible to suitably suppress the conspicuousness of the discharge section (opening).

Feature D6. The discharge portion is configured to open at the side surface portion (second vertical wall portion 138, 168) of the projecting portion,
The discharge unit includes a guide passage portion (guide passage portion 141b) that guides the game ball that has entered the opening in the lateral direction of the gaming machine,
The projecting portion is provided with a first region (second inclined portion 136) with relatively high light transmittance and a second region with relatively low light transmittance,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D5, wherein the second area includes at least an area (area 131c) on the front side of the gaming machine of the guide passage portion.

In the above configuration, since the protrusion is provided with the first region having a high light transmittance, for example, by providing the light emitting means behind the protrusion, for example, the first region is brightly illuminated. It is possible to improve the appearance of the protruding portion. However, in this case, the guiding passage and the game balls moving in the passage become visible through the projecting portion, which is not desirable in terms of making the discharge portion inconspicuous. In this regard, in this configuration, the second region having a low light transmittance is provided, and the second region includes at least the region located in front of the guide passage. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide passage portion and the game balls moving in the passage portion from being seen through in a front view from the front of the game machine, thereby making the discharge portion less conspicuous.

When this feature is applied to feature D5, the "first area" and the "second area" can be rephrased as "the first area" and "the second area", respectively.

Feature D7. The ball entry part and the discharge part each have an opening through which a game ball can pass,
The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the opening of the discharge section is smaller than that of the ball entry section.

According to the above configuration, the discharge section can be made less conspicuous than the ball-entering section, making it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the discharge section.

In addition, in this feature, the “opening portion” may be replaced with the “opening width”. In addition, in this feature, "the ball entry part and the discharge part are openings through which game balls can pass" are replaced with "the ball entry part and the discharge part are openings through which game balls flowing down the game area can pass." ” can be rephrased.

Feature D8. A first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to enter than in the first state. (closed state), a movable body (shutter 216, opening/closing door 305, second opening/closing plate 433) that can be switched
Based on a predetermined opportunity, the movable body is changed from the second state to the first state, and then switching control means for executing switching control to the second state (main controller 81 opening and closing the large winning opening function to perform processing) and
According to any one of characteristics D1 to D7, the ejection part is arranged on the side of the movable body when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and is configured to open toward the movable body. game machine.

In the above configuration, the ejection section is arranged on the side of the movable body, and the ejection section is configured to open on the movable body side. Visibility of the discharge section can be reduced. In addition, in the above configuration, since the momentum of the game ball flowing toward the side of the movable body can be used to smoothly enter the game ball into the discharge part, the flow of the game ball is reduced around the discharge part. Conspicuity due to stagnation, ball clogging, etc. is suppressed. As described above, it is possible to discharge the game ball from the game area while making the discharge of the game ball less conspicuous.

Feature D9. The movable body is configured to be displaceable between a predetermined first position (retracted position) and a second position (projection position) projecting forward of the gaming machine from the first position, and is at the second position. In the case, it is possible to receive the game ball flowing down the game area,
Characteristic D8 characterized by comprising derivation means (first shutter slant portion 217, second shutter slant portion 218) capable of deriving the game ball received by the movable body to the discharge portion side The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, game balls are suppressed from remaining on the movable body, and ball clogging in the movable body and its surrounding area is suppressed. For example, if ball jams occur frequently in these areas, the chances of getting jammed balls to be cleared by the staff of the playground increase, which makes the players feel annoyed, or creates a flow of game balls contrary to the design intent. Although there is concern about inconvenience, according to this configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature D10. The game according to feature D9, wherein the movable body is configured to be in the first state when it is in the first position, and to be in the second state when it is in the second position. machine.

According to the above configuration, when the switching control is not executed and the movable body is normalized to the first state, that is, when the movable body continues to be in the ball receiving state for a long period of time, the game ball received by the movable body can be guided to the ejection part and ejected from the game area as appropriate.

Feature D11. The game according to feature D9, wherein the movable body is configured to be in the second state when it is in the first position, and to be in the first state when it is in the second position. machine.

According to the above configuration, the game ball that did not enter the ball-entering portion under the first state (the state in which the ball can enter the ball-entering portion or is likely to enter the ball) is guided to the discharge portion, and is removed from the game area. It can be discharged as appropriate. In this case, since the discharge portion is less conspicuous, it is possible to discharge game balls that have not entered the ball-entering portion while suppressing emphasis on discharge. As a result, it is possible to adjust the degree of entry of the game ball into the ball entry portion while suppressing a decrease in the desire to play.

Feature D12. The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D11, wherein the discharge section is arranged adjacent to the movable body.

According to the above configuration, since the movable body (entering part) and the ejecting part are close to each other, it is possible to visually confirm whether the game ball entered the entering part or the ejecting part without moving the line of sight. This makes it possible to consolidate points of interest. As a result, distraction of attention is suppressed compared to the case where visual recognition of various locations is required, and the player can easily concentrate on the game.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature D11, the discharge part and the ball entering part are close to each other, so that the game ball enters the discharge part while making it look as if the game ball is entering the ball entering part. It is expected to have the effect of being able to sphere and make the discharge more inconspicuous.

Feature D13. The game machine according to feature D12, wherein the distance between the discharge part and the movable body is less than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the above configuration, the game ball is prevented from falling downward from between the movable body and the discharge part, and a separate guide path for guiding the game ball from the movable body to the discharge part is unnecessary. can be done. As a result, the configuration for guiding the game balls to the discharge section becomes simple, and the configuration can be optimized for a gaming machine with a limited game area.

When this feature is applied to the above feature D11, "For example, if the game ball falls from between the movable body and the discharging part, the player will not be able to see the game ball falling from the movable body. As a result of visual recognition, there is a risk that the player may have the impression that the game ball is likely to spill. It is possible to make it difficult to give the impression that the game ball is likely to spill, and it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the desire to play." is expected.

Feature D14. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball-entering portion (large winning portion 202, large winning portion 302, second winning portion 404) and a second ball-entering portion (outports 141, 171) which are provided in the game area and into which game balls can enter. When,
A first state (open state) in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter the first ball entering portion, and a game ball cannot enter the first ball entering portion or enters more than the first state. A movable body (shutter 216, opening/closing door 305, second opening/closing plate 433) that can be switched to a second state (closed state) that is difficult to move,
Based on a predetermined opportunity, the movable body is changed from the second state to the first state, and then switching control means for executing switching control to the second state (main controller 81 opening and closing the large winning opening function to perform processing) and
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance portion;
with
A gaming machine, wherein the second ball-entering portion is arranged on the side of the movable body in a front view from the front of the gaming machine, and is configured to open on the movable body side.

In the above configuration, the second ball-entering portion is arranged on the side of the movable body, and the second ball-entering portion is configured to open on the movable body side. Even when looking down, the visibility of the second ball entry portion can be reduced. In addition, in the above configuration, the momentum of the game ball flowing toward the side of the movable body can be used to smoothly enter the game ball into the second ball entry part, so the surroundings of the second ball entry part , conspicuousness such as stagnation of the flow of game balls or occurrence of ball clogging is suppressed. As described above, it is possible to make the game ball enter the second ball entering portion while being inconspicuous.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features D1 to D13 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the features D1 to D14, any of features A1 to A20, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C19, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G11, and features H1 to H7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of (1) individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (second winning opening portion 404, lower large winning opening 506) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry section (first winning opening section 403, upper large winning opening 505) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of imparting a privilege to a player based on the entry of a game ball into each of the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion;
A first state (closed state) provided corresponding to the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion and in which the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are closed; a movable body (opening/closing member 431) capable of switching between a second state (open state A) in which the ball-entering portion is opened and a third state (open state B) in which the second ball-entering portion is opened; ,
Switching control means for switching and controlling the movable body (function for executing the big winning opening opening/closing process by the main control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, a first state in which both the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are closed, a second state in which the first ball entry portion is open, and a state in which the second ball entry portion is open and a third state of . For this reason, compared with a uniform game in which only whether or not a game ball enters one ball entry part, it is possible to diversify the game ball entry mode and improve interest. Moreover, since such switching is realized by one movable body, there is a possibility that the first ball entrance portion will be in the open state and the second ball entrance portion will be in the open state when the movable body starts to operate. can give rise to both As a result, it is possible to impart the interest of predicting which ball-entering portion will be in the open state, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. The switching control means includes means for passing through the second state when the movable body is switched from the first state to the third state (a function of switching to the open state A via the open state B). The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized by comprising:

With the above configuration, when the movable body is switched from the first state to the third state, the behavior of the movable body halfway through the transition can be matched with the behavior when the first state is switched to the second state. During the period in which the behavior of the movable body matches, it is not determined whether the state will be the second state or the third state from the player's point of view. This is advantageous in ensuring the fun of predicting which ball entry part will be in the open state.

In addition, the present feature is that "the switching control means includes first means for switching the movable body to the second state, and second means for switching the movable body to the third state, and the second means It is characterized by being able to pass through the second state when the movable body is switched to the third state."

Feature E3. The switching control means is means for, when the movable body switches to the third state via the second state, making the period of the second state shorter than the period of the third state. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by comprising:

For example, when the movable body switches from the second state to the third state, if the period in which the movable body is in the second state is longer than the period in which the movable body is in the third state, the entrance to the first ball entrance portion A sphere is likely to occur, and the difference from the case where the movable body switches to the second state may become ambiguous. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the probability of a game ball entering the first ball entering portion can be kept low even though the second state is passed through, and the movable body is switched to the second state. appropriate differentiation of

Feature E4. wherein the second ball-entering portion is closed when the movable body is in the second state,
The switching control means is
a first means for switching the movable body to the second state (a function of switching the opening/closing member 431 to the open state A);
second means for switching the movable body to the third state (function for switching the opening/closing member 431 to the open state B);
with
When switching the movable body to the third state by the second means after switching the movable body to the second state by the first means, the movable body is switched to the third state without switching the movable body to the first state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that it has a configuration capable of switching between three states.

According to the above configuration, after the movable body is in the second state, it is configured to shift to the third state without returning to the first state, so that the period required for switching to the third state can be shortened. , allowing rapid state switching. Further, by not interposing the first state in which both the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are in the closed state between the second state and the third state, the game ball can It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the ball is not entered into any of the two ball-entering sections, and it is possible to achieve efficient ball-entering (privilege acquisition).

Feature E5. A game state transition means (by the main controller 81) that shifts to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the round game in which the switching control is performed can be executed multiple times under a predetermined condition (a big hit result) function to execute game state transition processing),
In the special game state, after switching the movable body to the second state by the first means in the previous round game, when switching the movable body to the third state by the second means in the subsequent round game The game machine according to feature E4, characterized in that the movable body can be switched to the third state without switching to the first state.

According to the above configuration, the waiting period between the previous round game and the subsequent round game can be eliminated or extremely shortened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which a game ball does not enter either the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section, and it is possible to promote efficient ball entry (acquisition of benefits). Become. In addition, the special game state can be progressed at a good tempo, making it possible to improve the time efficiency when playing the game. In addition, in this feature, the "next round game" may be replaced with the "next round game".

Feature E6. A game state transition means (by the main controller 81) that shifts to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the round game in which the switching control is performed can be executed multiple times under a predetermined condition (a big hit result) function to execute game state transition processing),
The switching control means is
a first means for performing first switching control for switching the movable body to the second state (a function of switching the opening/closing member 431 to the open state A);
a second means for performing second switching control for switching the movable body to the third state (a function of switching the opening/closing member 431 to the open state B);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the configuration is such that the first switching control and the second switching control can be executed in one round game.

According to the above configuration, since the ball-entering part that is easy to enter changes in one round game, it is expected that the player will carefully watch the behavior of the movable body, and the degree of attention to the game will be preferably increased. becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to diversify the flow of the game ball and the manner in which the game ball enters, compared to a uniform game in which the game ball enters or not enters one ball entry part, and it is possible to improve the interest. Become.

It should be noted that this feature is "game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (opening and closing execution mode) that can execute the round game in which the switching control is performed multiple times under a predetermined condition (a big hit result) (a function of executing game state transition processing by the main control device 81), and in one of the round games, switching the movable body to the second state and switching the movable body to the third state; It is characterized by a configuration capable of executing

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the movable body can be switched to a fourth state in which the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion are opened. .

In the above configuration, there is a fourth state in which the ball can enter both the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion. In the second state and the third state, the player can predict to some extent which ball entry portion the game ball will enter from the state of the movable body, but such prediction becomes difficult in the fourth state. . Since such a state is included in the switching mode of the movable body, it is expected that the player's interest in the flow (destination) of the game ball will be further increased, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game. become.

Feature E8. wherein, when the movable body switches from the second state to the third state, a period in which the movable body is in the second state and a period in which the movable body is in the third state can overlap; The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the movable body is in the fourth state at least during the overlapping period.

According to the above configuration, the fourth state can be generated in the middle of switching from the second state to the third state. It is possible to complicate the manner in which the game ball enters the ball-entering section and the second ball-entering section, thereby improving interest.

Feature E9. The movable body is provided with respect to the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion so as to be in the first state at a predetermined position,
When the movable body is displaced from the predetermined position in the first direction, the second state is established, and when the movable body is displaced from the predetermined position in the second direction different from the first direction, the third state is established. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it is configured to:

According to the above configuration, the direction in which the movable body is displaced from a predetermined position changes which ball-entering portion is in the open state. Conceivable. Therefore, it is expected that the player will pay attention to the behavior of the movable body, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In this feature, "first direction" and "second direction" are respectively "first direction" and "second direction", "first traveling direction" and "second traveling direction", or "first direction" It may also be referred to as "side" and "second side".

Feature E10. The gaming machine of feature E9, wherein the second direction is a direction opposite to the first direction.

According to the above configuration, by making the movable body reciprocable, switching from the first state to the second state and from the first state to the third state can be realized, thereby simplifying the configuration. It becomes possible to plan In addition, since the direction of displacement for the second state and the direction of displacement for the third state are opposite to each other, there is an advantage that the difference in the direction of displacement of the movable body can be easily recognized from the player's point of view.

Feature E11. Means for differentiating the degree of advantage for the player between when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion and when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion (executing notification effect control processing by the effect control device 82) and a function of differentiating the number of game balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the upper big winning port 505 and when the game balls enter the lower big winning port 506). A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10.

According to the above configuration, not only is the ball-entering part into which the game ball is likely to enter be switched, but also the pleasure of the player can be differentiated depending on whether the game ball enters the first ball-entering part or the second ball-entering part. be able to. Therefore, it is expected that not only will the player pay more attention to the behavior of the movable body, but also it will be more interesting to predict the ball-entering portion that will be in the open state.

Feature E12. Means for making it more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion than when the game ball enters the second ball entering portion (announcement effect control processing by the effect control device 82) and a function of paying out more game balls than when the game balls enter the upper big winning hole 505 when the game balls win the lower big winning hole 506). The gaming machine according to feature E11.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the first ball entering part, it is more advantageous than entering the second ball entering part, so that the ball entering the first ball entering part is realized. It can increase the happiness of the case. As a result, it is possible to markedly improve interest in which ball entry portion the game ball enters, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E13. The privilege granting means is
a first privilege granting means capable of granting a first privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry section;
a second privilege imparting means capable of imparting a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering section;
The gaming machine according to feature E12, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the first ball-entering section, the second privilege is granted, which is more advantageous than the first privilege granted based on the ball entering the second ball-entering section. Therefore, it is possible to increase the pleasure when the ball enters the first ball-entering portion. As a result, it is possible to markedly improve interest in which ball entry portion the game ball enters, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E14. Based on a predetermined specific opportunity (jackpot result), special game state transition means (main controller 81 function to execute game state transition processing by) and
In the case of a predetermined game result (when the jackpot type is sorted to the 15R normal jackpot result), the game state after the special game state ends is set to the first game state (low probability mode), and the predetermined game result is obtained. In the case of a game result different from the game result (when the jackpot type is assigned to the non-explicit probability variable 15R jackpot result), a second game state in which the game state after the special game state is different from the first game state State means (function for executing transition processing (step S412) at the end of the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 81) to make
with
When the game state after the end of the special game state is set to the first game state by the means for the state, the switching control means controls the number of times the state becomes the second state in the special game state or the third state The switching control is executed so that the probability that the number of times of becoming more than a predetermined number of times is different from the case where the game state after the special game state is changed to the second game state by the state means. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E13, characterized by comprising means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to add interest in guessing the game state after the end of the special game state from the number of times the movable body enters the second state or the third state in the special game state. As a result, the player's interest in the behavior of the movable body is greatly increased, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of interest in the game. In this feature, "probability" includes 0%, and "predetermined number of times" includes 0 times.

Feature E15. Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (opening and closing execution mode) capable of executing a round game multiple times based on a predetermined specific opportunity (a big hit result) (game by main controller 81 function to execute state transition processing),
In the case of a predetermined game result (when the jackpot type is sorted to the 15R normal jackpot result), the game state after the special game state ends is set to the first game state (low probability mode), and the predetermined game result is obtained. In the case of a game result different from the game result (when the jackpot type is assigned to the non-explicit probability variable 15R jackpot result), a second game state in which the game state after the special game state is different from the first game state State means (function for executing transition processing (step S412) at the end of the opening/closing execution mode by the main controller 81) to make
with
The switching control means, when the game state after the end of the special game state is set to the first game state by the state-use means, becomes the second state in a predetermined round game in the special game state. The means for executing the switching control is provided so that the probability or the probability of becoming the third state is different from the case where the game state after the end of the special game state is changed to the second game state by the state means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E13, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to add interest in guessing the game state after the end of the special game state from the state of the movable body in the predetermined round game. As a result, the player's interest in the behavior of the movable body is greatly increased, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of interest in the game. In addition, since it is sufficient to pay attention to the behavior of the movable body in a predetermined round game, compared to the case where all the round games performed in the special game state are targeted or the notable round game is not determined, the game It is possible to lighten the burden on the person. In this feature, "probability" includes 0%.

Feature E16. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (second winning opening portion 404, lower large winning opening 506) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A second ball entry section (first winning opening section 403, upper large winning opening 505) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
one opening/closing means (opening/closing member 431) provided corresponding to the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion and capable of opening and closing the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion;
an opening/closing control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening/closing process by the main control device 81) for controlling the opening/closing means to operate in a predetermined operation mode;
Means for differentiating the degree of advantage for the player when the game ball enters the first ball entering portion and the case where the game ball enters the second ball entering portion (the game ball entering the second winning opening portion 404) A function of executing a notification effect based on the winning, and a function of differentiating the number of game balls to be paid out depending on whether the game balls have won in the upper big winning opening 505 or the lower big winning opening 506). ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, switching between the open/closed states of the first ball-entering portion and the second ball-entering portion is realized by the one opening/closing means. That is, since the ball-entering portion and the opening/closing means correspond in many-to-one correspondence, when the opening/closing means operates, the ball-entering portion that switches to the open state is not uniquely defined, and which ball-entering portion is in the open state. It is possible to provide the fun of predicting whether or not. Moreover, since the degree of advantage for the player is different between entering the ball into the first ball-entering section and entering the ball into the second ball-entering section, the player is greatly interested in which ball-entering section is in the open state. matter. As a result, it is expected that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the opening/closing means, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features E1 to E15 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the features E1 to E16, any one of the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of (1) individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section (first winning opening 403, big winning opening 202) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
An open state (open state) provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion, in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter the ball-entering portion, and an open state in which a game ball cannot enter the ball-entering portion or the open state a movable body (opening/closing members 631, 731) that can be switched to a closed state (closed state) in which it is harder to enter a ball than
Switching control means for switching the movable body from the closed state to the open state based on a predetermined specific trigger, and then executing switching control to the closed state (large winning opening opening/closing process by main controller 81 functions to perform) and
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
with
A ball receiving portion (the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 and the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the game area in a situation where the movable body is at least in the closed state is provided. and
The ball receiving portion is configured to allow the game ball received by the ball receiving portion to move in a predetermined direction (the direction toward the out ports 141 and 171),
A game characterized by comprising variable means (a function of switching between a closed state A and a closed state B) capable of changing the easiness of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction in the ball receiving portion. machine.

In the above configuration, since the privilege is given to the game ball based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering portion, when the movable body is in the open state, the game ball enters the ball entering portion. You can enjoy whether or not you will enter the ball. In addition, the above configuration has a ball receiving portion capable of receiving a game ball in a state where the movable body is in the closed state, and facilitates movement of the game ball in a predetermined direction on the ball receiving portion. It is possible to change. Therefore, when the movable body is in the closed state, the way the game ball flows on the ball receiving portion is diversified, and the movement of the game ball can be changed. As a result, not only when the movable body is in the open state, but also when the movable body is in the closed state, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the behavior of the game ball, and thus it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game. be possible.

In addition, in this configuration, it is possible to vary the easiness of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction on the ball receiving portion, so that there is an advantage that the width of the game design is widened. That is, in the design of the game machine, for example, when it is desirable that the game ball is difficult to move on the ball receiving part under certain circumstances, if the ball receiving part is structured so that the game ball is difficult to move, the effect of the game in general will be affected. and may affect other situations. In this respect, according to the present configuration, it is possible to select the easiness of movement according to the situation even in the same closed state, and it is possible to relax the restrictions on the game design. As a result, it is possible to promote the realization of a game machine that is more interesting.

Feature F2. Characteristic feature F1, characterized in that when the movable body switches from the closed state to the open state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the ball entering portion. game machine.

In the above configuration, when the movable body is switched from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rests on the ball receiving portion so that the game ball can enter the ball entering portion. In this case, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion in the closed state has a higher probability of entering the ball entering portion as the staying period on the ball receiving portion is longer. For this reason, by changing the ease of movement of the game ball on the ball receiving portion in a predetermined direction, that is, the ease of passing through the ball receiving portion, for example, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter. It is possible to create a special state in which it is easy to enter the ball section separately from a state in which it is not so, and it is possible to improve interest.

Feature F3. a first ball-entering portion as the ball-entering portion;
A second ball entry portion (second winning opening portion 404) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
with
The privilege granting means is a means capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance portion (a prize ball is awarded based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening portion 404). function to pay out),
The feature F1 is characterized in that when the movable body switches from the open state to the closed state, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second ball entering portion. The game machine described.

According to the said structure, there can exist an effect similar to the said characteristic F2. In addition, in the above configuration, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion can enter the second ball entering portion instead of the first ball entering portion. For example, if the configuration is such that a game ball received by the ball receiving portion enters the first ball entering portion, the ball enters due to the movable body being in the first state (not through the ball receiving portion). Since the destination of the game ball is the same as in the case where the ball is entered by ), it may be difficult to identify which route the ball was entered in the gaming machine. In this regard, in this configuration, the destination of the game ball is different depending on whether the ball is entered via the ball receiving portion or not. can be easily identified. For this reason, it is easy to differentiate between the former case and the latter case, for example, by providing a difference in the degree of advantage. can be

Feature F4. As game states, it has a first game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the switching control is executed and a second game state (normal game state) in which the switching control is not executed,
The variable means is
The easiness of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction in the ball receiving portion is divided into a first state (closed state A) in which the game ball is relatively easy to move and a second state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to move. (closed state B) and can be switched,
It is characterized by comprising a state change means (a function of closing state B in at least one round game in the opening and closing execution mode) for setting the second state during at least a part of the period of the first game state. The gaming machine according to feature F2 or F3.

According to the above configuration, in the first game state in which the switching control is performed, as a result of lengthening the stay period of the game ball on the ball receiving portion, the entering ball through the ball receiving portion is under the first game state. more likely to occur in As a result, the interest is enhanced, and it becomes possible to suitably arouse the desire to play.

In addition, in this feature, "the game state has a first game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the switching control is executed and a second game state (normal game state) in which the switching control is not executed". "lottery means (function of executing lottery by the main control unit 81) for performing lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the above-mentioned a game state transition means (function for executing game state transition processing by the main controller 81) for shifting the game state to the special game state when a result corresponding to the occurrence of the special game state is obtained; When the state shifts to the special game state, the switching control is executed by the switching control means”, and the “first game state” and “second game state” are respectively “ It may be rephrased as "special game state" and "normal game state". Also, "the switching control is executed" may be rephrased as "the switching control is executed a plurality of times".

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the state changing means changes the state to the first state when the state is the second game state.

According to the above configuration, under the second game state in which the switching control is not executed, the flow of game balls on the ball receiving portion is smoothed, and ball clogging in the ball receiving portion and its peripheral area is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball to enter the ball through the ball receiving portion in the first game state while avoiding the influence on the second game state.

Feature F6. A discharge part (out ports 141, 171) is provided in the game area and is capable of discharging the game ball that has passed through the ball receiving part by movement in the predetermined direction from the game area. The gaming machine according to feature F5.

In the second game state, the switching control is not executed and the flow of the game balls in the ball receiving portion is smoothed, so that the game balls pass through the ball receiving portion one after another, The game balls tend to accumulate on the downstream side of the . In this regard, in this configuration, since the game balls that have passed through the ball receiving portion can be discharged from the game area as appropriate, the game balls accumulate on the downstream side of the ball receiving portion, the flow of game balls is stagnant, and ball clogging occurs. It becomes possible to suppress

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to any one of features F4 to F6, wherein the state changing means executes switching to the second state in response to execution of the switching control.

According to the above configuration, switching control is performed to switch to the second state, and a configuration suitable for setting the second state in the first game state can be provided. In addition, in this feature, the configuration of "maintaining the state immediately before the switching control when the switching control is not executed" may be further limited.

Feature F8. As the switching control, a first switching control in which the switching control is performed in a predetermined manner (the aspects of FIGS. 49(a) to 49(e), the aspect of FIG. 52(a)), and the predetermined aspect. and a second switching control in which the switching control is performed in a different aspect (the aspect of FIGS. 49(e) to 49(g), the aspect of FIG. 52(b)),
The state changing means includes means for setting the state to the second state when the first switching control is executed, and setting the state to the first state when the second switching control is executed. A gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features F4 to F7.

According to the above configuration, since the mode of switching control of the movable body corresponds to the state of the ball receiving portion, a player who is interested in whether the first state or the second state will be able to control the movement of the movable body. It is thought that the player will pay attention to the game, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, when the switching control is executed a plurality of times in the first game state, by controlling which one of the first switching control and the second switching control is performed in each time of the switching control, the first state and the second state , and it is possible to diversify the pattern of state switching. Furthermore, by setting the final switching control in the first game state to the second switching control, the second game state can be started in a state returned to the first state. As a result, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the ball receiving portion in the second game state, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of inducing ball clogging or the like.

Feature F9. A first position (position of closed state A in FIG. 48(a), position of closed state A in FIG. 52(a)) and the first position (position of closed state A in FIG. A specific body (movable plate 651, extending portion 735) capable of moving to a second position different from the first position (position of closed state B in FIG. 48(b), position of closed state B in FIG. 52(b)) with
The features F4 to F8, characterized in that the first state is established by arranging the specific object at the first position, and the second state is attained by arranging the specific object at the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the specific body that operates in conjunction with the movement of the movable body is provided, and the positional displacement of the specific body can change the ease of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction in the ball receiving portion. It is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated drive unit for the control and the ball receiving unit.

Feature F10. The ball receiving portion includes a first ball receiving surface (the upper surface portion 433b of the second opening/closing plate 433) and a second ball receiving surface (the second surface portion of the movable plate 651) that differ in ease of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction. 658), and the second ball receiving surface is configured such that the game ball is less likely to move in the predetermined direction than the first ball receiving surface,
Features F4 to F8 characterized in that the first state is to receive a game ball on the first ball receiving surface, and the second state is to receive a game ball on the second ball receiving surface. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize switching between the first state and the second state by switching the ball receiving surface. can be done. In addition, by changing the state by such a plane switching, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the state is the first state or the second state.

Feature F11. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section (first winning opening 403, big winning opening 202) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
An open state (open state) provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion, in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter the ball-entering portion, and an open state in which a game ball cannot enter the ball-entering portion or the open state a movable body (opening/closing members 631, 731) that can be switched to a closed state (closed state) in which it is harder to enter a ball than
Switching control means for switching the movable body from the closed state to the open state based on a predetermined specific trigger, and then executing switching control to the closed state (large winning opening opening/closing process by main controller 81 functions to perform) and
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
A first position (position of closed state A in FIG. 48(a), position of closed state A in FIG. 52(a)) and the first position (position of closed state A in FIG. A specific body (movable plate 651, extending portion 735) capable of moving to a second position different from the first position (position of closed state B in FIG. 48(b), position of closed state B in FIG. 52(b)) When,
In a state where the movable body is at least in the closed state, it is possible to receive a game ball flowing down the game area, and a first state and a second state in which the ease of movement of the received game ball in a predetermined direction is different. a ball receiving portion (the second surface portion 658 of the movable plate 651 and the upper surface portion 732a of the shutter portion 732) that can be switched between two states;
with
The ball receiving portion is in the first state when the specific body is placed at the first position, and is in the second state when the specific body is placed at the second position. game machine.

According to the above configuration, an effect similar to that of feature A1 can be obtained. In addition, a specific body that operates in conjunction with the movement of the movable body is provided, and the positional displacement of the specific body can change the ease of movement of the game ball in the predetermined direction at the ball receiving part, so special control and A dedicated drive for the ball receiver can be dispensed with.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the above features F1 to F10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature F12. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
An open state (open state) provided in the game area, in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter, and a closed state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than in the open state, Variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 201, 401) that can be switched to
Variable ball entry control means (by the main controller 81) for executing variable ball entry control to change the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state based on a predetermined specific trigger. A function to execute the opening and closing process of the big winning opening),
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means;
with
The variable ball entry means has a plurality of modes in which the mode of the closed state includes a predetermined first mode (closed state A) and a second mode (closed state B) different from the first mode. It is possible to switch,
The variable ball-entering control means, when changing the variable ball-entering means from the open state to the closed state, sets the mode of the closed state of the variable ball-entering means to any one of the plurality of modes. Mode control means (function for switching between closed state A and closed state B),
The game machine is characterized in that the degree of advantage for the player differs between when the closed state mode of the variable ball-entering means is the first mode and when it is the second mode.

According to the above configuration, the mode of the closed state includes a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode. be done. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of enjoying in which mode the variable ball entry means is closed, which is more interesting than a uniform game in which the variable ball entry means is simply opened and closed. can be improved. Moreover, since the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether the closed state is the first mode or the second mode, there is a strong interest in which mode the variable ball entry means is closed. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features F1 to F11 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the features F1 to F12, any one of the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E16, the features G1 to G11, and the features H1 to H7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of (1) individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A passage forming body (opening/closing member 431) provided in the game area and capable of forming a passage portion for game balls;
with
The passage forming body has a first position (Fig. 42(a)) in which a predetermined surface of the passage forming body (the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening/closing plate 483) faces upward and the predetermined surface constitutes the floor portion of the passage portion (Fig. 42(a)). ), and the second position (opening state B in FIG. 42(b)) where the game ball on the floor can be dropped downward. (rotating position) and can be rotated to
An upright portion (first opening/closing plate 432) which stands upward when the passage forming body is in the first position and extends in the passage direction of the passage forming member is provided on the predetermined surface of the passage forming member. A game machine characterized by being provided with.

According to the above configuration, by rotating the passage forming body, the game ball on the passage portion is dropped and flowed downward under the passage forming member, while the standing portion causes the new game ball to move downward from the passage forming member. can be suppressed from flowing into As a result, the opportunity for the game ball to flow down below the passage forming body can be restricted, and the pleasure when the game ball falls can be increased. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the standing portion is spaced apart from the tip of rotation of the predetermined surface by at least the diameter of the game ball.

According to the above configuration, when the passage forming body is at the first position, the game ball can be placed in front of the standing portion on the predetermined surface, and when the passage forming body is rotated to the second position, the game ball can be placed from the predetermined surface. It is possible to suppress that the falling of the game ball is hindered by the standing portion. That is, it is possible to satisfactorily achieve both the function of dropping the game ball received on the predetermined surface and the function of preventing the game ball from falling further.

Feature G3. The game machine according to feature G2, wherein the standing portion is provided at an end of the predetermined surface opposite to the leading end of the rotation.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature G2 can be enhanced, and the configuration can be optimized for realizing the configuration of the feature G2.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the standing portion extends over the entire length of the predetermined surface in the path direction.

According to the above configuration, when the passage forming body is at the second position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the side of the standing portion and flowing into the lower side of the passage forming body. This can be a preferred mode for limiting inflow opportunities.

Feature G5. A predetermined space portion (first winning opening portion 403 and first ball passage 405) is provided on the rear side of the game machine of the standing portion when the passage forming body is in the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4.

When the passage forming body is at the second position, a game ball is placed on the standing portion, and when the passage forming member rotates to the first position in this state, the game ball is placed between the standing portion and an object behind the standing portion. There is a risk of getting caught and ball jamming. In this regard, in this configuration, since the space is provided behind the standing portion, the game ball on the standing portion can escape to the space, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball biting.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the space can accommodate one or more game balls.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of ball jamming.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, further comprising guide means (first ball passage 405) capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the space to another area.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the game balls from accumulating in the space, and to more preferably suppress the occurrence of ball biting.

Feature G8. Provided in the game area, a first ball entry portion (out ports 141, 171) and a second ball entry portion (second winning opening portion 404) into which game balls can enter,
A game ball that has passed through the passage portion can enter the first ball entering portion, while a game ball that has fallen from the passage portion can enter the second ball entering portion,
Characteristic features G1 to G1 characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the second ball entering part than when the game ball enters the first ball entering part. The gaming machine according to any one of G7.

According to the above configuration, it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball fall in the middle of the passage than to completely cross the passage. It is possible to suitably stir the expectation of what will happen. In addition, it is assumed that the player will be more interested in the behavior of the game ball and the passage forming body, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G9. While a privilege can be given based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry part, there is no opportunity for awarding a privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry part. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature G8.

According to the above configuration, since the first ball-entering part and the second ball-entering part are differentiated depending on whether or not the privilege is given, it is possible to more strongly arouse expectations for the game ball to fall from the passage. It is possible to enhance the effect of the feature G2.

Feature G10. When the passage formation body is in the first position, the passage section covers the game ball flow path (passage section 408) downward of the passage formation body from above, while the passage formation body is positioned at the second position. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G9, wherein the standing portion covers the game ball flow path from above when the game ball path is in the position.

According to the above configuration, even when the passage forming body is in either the first position or the second position, since the game ball flow path to the lower side of the passage forming body is covered from above, the first position and the second position can restrict the inflow of game balls into the game ball flow path. As a result, the opportunity for the game ball to flow into the game ball flow path is limited to the process of turning the passage forming body from the first position to the second position (when switching from the first position to the second position), It is possible to increase the pleasure when the ball flows into the game ball flow path.

Feature G11. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A passage forming body (opening/closing member 431) provided in the game area and capable of forming a passage portion for game balls;
with
The passage forming body has a first position (Fig. 42(a)) in which a predetermined surface of the passage forming body (the upper surface portion 483b of the second opening/closing plate 483) faces upward and the predetermined surface constitutes the floor portion of the passage portion (Fig. 42(a)). ), and the second position (opening state B in FIG. 42(b)) where the game ball on the floor can be dropped downward. (rotating position) and can be rotated to
The predetermined surface of the passage forming body is provided with a protruding portion (first opening/closing plate 432) that protrudes upward when the passage forming body is in the first position,
A gaming machine, wherein the protruding portion is provided at an end portion of the predetermined surface opposite to the leading end of the passage forming body.

According to the above configuration, by rotating the passage forming body, the game ball on the passage portion is dropped and flowed downward under the passage forming member, and the projecting portion causes a new game ball to be pushed downward from the passage forming member. can be suppressed from flowing into As a result, the opportunity for the game ball to flow down below the passage forming body can be restricted, and the pleasure when the game ball falls can be increased. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Note that each configuration described in any one of the features G1 to G10 may be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

For each configuration of the features G1 to G11, any one of the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F12, and the features H1 to H7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of (1) individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first start-up ball entry portion (upper operation port 33) and a second start-up ball entry portion (third operation port 803) provided in the game area;
First information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the upper operation opening 33 by the main control device 81);
First addition determination means for performing first addition determination as to whether or not the special information acquired by the first information acquisition means corresponds to the addition information (execution of suitability determination processing for the upper operation opening 33 by the main controller 81 function) and
Second information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the third operation opening 803 by the main control device 81);
a second acquired information storage means (holding area Rb for the second result display portion of the holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the second information acquiring means with a predetermined number as the upper limit;
A second addition determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the second information acquisition means corresponds to the addition information, and if a plurality of pieces of special information are stored in the second information acquisition means A second grant determination means (a function of executing a propriety determination process for the third operation opening 803 by the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the second grant determination for the plurality of pieces of special information;
A special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state when the determination result by the first grant determination means or the second grant determination means corresponds to the grant information. A gaming machine configured to transition to a state,
An open state (open state) provided in the game area, in which a game ball can enter or is likely to enter, and a closed state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than in the open state, A variable winning means (variable winning device 802) that can be switched to
Privilege granting means (payout control device 97) capable of granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means;
with
The configuration is such that, when the game state shifts to the special game state, the variable ball entry means is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the variable ball entry control is executed to be in the closed state,
The second grant determination is set to be more advantageous to the player than the first grant determination,
When it is in the special game state, it becomes a first state in which the game ball can enter or is likely to enter the second start ball entering portion, and when it is in the normal game state, the game ball enters the second start ball entering portion. A game machine characterized by comprising a specific means (second opening/closing plate 433) for setting the second state in which the ball cannot be entered or is harder to enter than in the first state.

According to the above configuration, the ball entering the second starting ball entering portion corresponding to the second award determination that is advantageous to the player occurs or is likely to occur in the special game state in which the variable ball entering control is executed. By shifting the game state to the special game state, the player not only obtains a privilege given by entering the ball into the variable ball entry means, but also has the right to receive the second award judgment on the advantageous side in the subsequent game. becomes possible to obtain. On the other hand, in the normal game state, the ball does not enter the second starting ball entering portion or is difficult to enter, so it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game under excessively advantageous conditions. Thus, according to this configuration, it is possible to add value to the special game state and improve the attractiveness of the special game state while avoiding the effect on the normal game state.

Feature H2. A first acquired information storage means (reservation area Ra for the first result display section of the reservation ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the first information acquisition means with a predetermined first predetermined number as an upper limit. ,
The first application determination means is configured to perform the first application determination based on special information stored in the first information acquisition means,
Acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry section rather than the first grant determination for the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry section Characteristic feature H1, characterized by comprising a priority means (function for executing data setting processing by the main controller 81) capable of preferentially executing the second addition determination for the special information to be provided. game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the second grant determination is performed with priority over the first grant determination, at the end of the special game state, the special information corresponding to the ball entering the first start ball entering section and the second Even if both the special information corresponding to the ball entering the 2-start ball entering section is stored, the second award determination on the advantageous side is preferentially performed. As a result, even though the ball is entered into the second starting ball entry portion in the special game state, the first award determination on the disadvantageous side may be performed prior to the second award determination in the game after the end. Suppressed. When this feature is applied to the feature H1, the "predetermined number" in the second acquired information storage means can be rephrased as a "second predetermined number".

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the second starting ball-entering unit is provided downstream of the variable ball-entering means in the game area.

For example, if the second start ball entry part is present upstream of the variable ball entry means, the game ball will not reach the variable ball entry means due to the entry to the second start ball entry part, resulting in Entry into the variable entry means may be blocked. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the second starting ball-entering section is located downstream of the variable ball-entering means, game balls that have not entered the variable ball-entering means enter the second starting ball-entering section. As a result, it is suppressed that the ball entering the second starting ball entering portion hinders the ball entering the variable ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to cause or make it easier to cause a ball to enter the second start ball-entering section in the special game state while suppressing the influence of the ball-entering state to the variable ball-entering means.

Feature H4. The specifying means regulates the game balls from flowing into the specified area (the area below the variable winning device 802) in the case of the normal game state, and allows the game balls to enter the specified area in the case of the special game state. Equipped with a means (second opening and closing plate 433) that allows inflow,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein a game ball that has flowed into the specific area can enter the second start ball entering section.

According to the above configuration, by a relatively simple configuration of switching whether or not to allow the inflow of game balls into the specific area according to the game state, when the special game state is the first state, normal game state In this case, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the second state is established, and this is a practically preferable aspect in realizing the configuration of the feature H1.

Feature H5. a third starting ball-entering portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the gaming area and different from the first starting ball-entering portion and the second starting ball-entering portion;
A first mode (open state of the electric accessory 34a) in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the third start ball entry part, and a game ball cannot be accepted in the third start ball entry part or is more than the first mode a receiving means (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to a second mode (closed state of electric accessory 34a) that is difficult to accept;
Acceptance control means (function for executing electric support processing by the main controller 81) for changing the acceptance means from the second mode to the first mode, and then executing acceptance control for changing the acceptance means to the second mode;
A passage portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and through which game balls can pass;
acceptance information acquisition means for acquiring acceptance information based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion (function for executing winning processing for through by the main control device 81);
Based on the acceptance information acquired by the acceptance information acquisition means, the acceptance determination means for determining whether or not to execute the acceptance control by the acceptance control means function) and
with
The second information acquisition means is configured to acquire special information based on the entry of a game ball into each of the second starting ball entering section and the third starting ball entering section. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4.

According to the above configuration, in addition to the second starting ball-entering part, the third starting ball-entering part corresponding to the second award determination is provided, so it is possible to secure an opportunity to receive the second award determination in the normal game state. become. Moreover, when the determination for acceptance performed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage portion becomes a predetermined result, and the acceptance means is switched to the first mode, the game ball can enter or enters the third start ball entry portion. Since it is a structure that makes it easy to play, it is possible to prevent the frequency of ball-entering the third starting ball-entering portion from becoming excessively high in the normal game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous, and it is possible to prevent the significance of providing the second starting ball-entering section from being diminished.

Feature H6. The specifying means regulates the game balls from flowing into the specified area (the area below the variable winning device 802) in the case of the normal game state, and allows the game balls to enter the specified area in the case of the special game state. Equipped with a means (second opening and closing plate 433) that allows inflow,
A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is configured to be able to enter the second start ball entering section,
The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein the third starting ball-entering section is arranged upstream of the specific area in the game area.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that even the entry of the game ball into the third start ball entry section is restricted as a result of restricting the entry of the game ball into the specific area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second start-up ball-entering part, or to prevent the game ball from entering the second start-up ball-entering part, while suppressing the impact on the ball-entering situation of the game ball into the third start-up ball-entering part. become.

Feature H7. The specifying means includes ball receiving means (second opening/closing plate 433) capable of receiving a game ball when the variable ball entry means is in the closed state,
The ball receiving means regulates the inflow of game balls below the ball receiving means when the variable ball entering means is in the closed state, and the variable ball entering means changes from the closed state to the open state. A configuration that allows a game ball to drop downward from the ball receiving means based on the switching,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein a game ball that has flowed into the lower part of the ball receiving means can enter the second starting ball entering section.

According to the above configuration, by opening and closing the variable ball entry means with the transition to the special game state, switching to the first state in the special game state and to the second state in the normal game state is performed. It can be realized, and it can be a practically preferable mode in realizing the configuration of the feature H1.

For each configuration of the features H1 to H7, any one of the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D14, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of (1) individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

In addition, the technical ideas shown in each invention of each feature A to H group described above may be applied to each invention of each feature A to H group. It may be applied to each invention of Group H. Moreover, all or part of the various configurations shown in each invention of each feature group A to H can be arbitrarily combined.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine (ball-use reel-type game machine): Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping and displaying the symbol row. The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device for generating a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to players, furthermore, providing a ball receiving tray for performing a casting process for taking in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and dispensing game balls to the ball receiving tray. and a payout device, wherein the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown in by the throwing device.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 31... General prize-winning opening, 33... Upper operation opening, 34... Lower operation opening, 97... Payout control device, 131... Left flow path formation part, 133... First inclined part, 136... Second inclined part , 141... Out port 161... Right channel forming part 163... First slope part 166... Second slope part 171... Out port 201, 301, 401, 501, 802... Variable winning device 321... Bottom Side out port 403 First winning port 404 Second winning port 431, 631, 731 Opening/closing member 432 First opening/closing plate 433 Second opening/closing plate 651 Movable plate 732 Shutter part, 735... Extension part, 803... Third operating port.

Claims (1)

a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on a predetermined shooting operation;
a passage forming body capable of forming a passage for game balls;
with
The passage forming body is displaceable between a first position and a second position different from the first position,
At the first position, a predetermined surface of the passage forming body can constitute the passage portion,
When the passage forming body is displaced from the first position to the second position, the game balls on a predetermined surface of the passage forming body can flow down to a predetermined area downstream from the predetermined surface. ,
A specific passing portion through which the game ball that has flowed down to the predetermined area can pass, and a predetermined privilege can be given based on the passage of the game ball through the specific passing portion,
a protruding portion provided on a predetermined surface of the passage forming body and protruding upward when the passage forming body is in the first position;
the passage forming body can be displaced between the first position and the second position by rotation;
A gaming machine, wherein the protruding portion is provided at a predetermined portion near the rotation base end of the passage forming body on the predetermined surface of the passage forming member.

Images